Skip to main content

Full text of "California fish and game"

See other formats


OMIFDRN1AI 
FISH-GAME 

tONSERV/fflOK  Of  WILD  UFE  THROUGH    EDUCATION" 


STATE  OF  CALIFORNIA 

DEPARTMENT  OF  NATURAL  RESOURCES 

DIVISION  OF  FISH  AND  GAME 
San  Francisco,  California 

EARL  WARREN 
Governor 

WARREN  T.  HANNUM 
Director  of  Natural  Resources 


FISH  AND  GAME  COMMISSION 

LEE  F.  PAYNE,  President 
Los  Angeles 

PAUL  DENNY,  Commissioner  HARVEY  E.  HASTAIN,  Commissioner 

Etna  Brawley 

WILLIAM  J.  SILVA,  Commissioner  CARL  F.  WENTE,  Commissioner 

Modesto  San  Francisco 

E.  L.  MACAULAY 

Executive  Officer 

San  Francisco 


CALIFORNIA  FISH  AND  GAME 

PHIL  M.  ROEDEL,  Editor  Terminal  Island 

Editorial  Board 

RICHARD  S.  CROKER San  Francisco 

WILLIAM  A.  DILL Fresno 

JOHN  E.  CHATTIN San  Francisco 


California  Fish  and  Game  is  a  journal  devoted  to  the  conservation  of  wildlife 
which  is  published  quarterlv  bv  the  California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game.  Contributions 
should  be  sent  to  Mr.  Phil  M.  Roedel,  Editor,  State  Fisheries  Laboratory,  Terminal 
Island  Station,  San  Pedro,  California.  Manuscripts  must  be  typed,  double  spaced,  and 
conform  to  the  style  of  previous  issues. 

The  articles  appearing  herein  are  not  copyrighted  and  may  be  reproduced  else- 
where, provided  due  credit  is  given  the  authors  and  the  California  Division  of  Fish  and 
Game. 

This  periodical  is  sent  free  of  charge  to  interested  persons,  who  may  have  their 
names  placed  on  the  mailing  list  by  writing  to  the  editor.  Subscriptions  must  be  renewed 
annually  by  returning  the  postcard  included  with  each  October  issue.  Subscribers  are 
requested  to  notify  the  editor  immediately  of  changes  in  address,  giving  the  old  address 
as  well  as  the  new. 


CALIFORNIA  FISH  and  GAME 

"CONSERVATION    OF    WILDLIFE   THROUGH    EDUCATION" 

Volume  37  [SSUED  JULY    I,    L951  Number  3 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

The  Devils  Garden    Deer  Eerd 

[nterstate  Deer  Herd  Committee     233 

Notes  on  Kokanee  Spawning  in  Donner  Lake. 

California,  1949__  __J.  B.  Kimskv     27:! 

Early  Development  of  the  Cottid  Fish,  Clinocottus 

recalvus  (Greeley) -.Robert  W.  Morris     281 

Plastic  Deterioration  and  Metal  Corrosion  in  Peterson  Disk 

Fish  Tags__ A.  J.  Calhoun,  D.  II.  Fry,  Jr.,  and  E.  P.  Hughes     301 

The  Relative  Abundance  of  Sharks  and  Bat  Stingrays  in 

San  Francisco  Bay Earl  S.  Herald  and  Wm.  Ellis  Ripley     315 

Results  of  the  Pismo  Clam  Censuses,  1948,  1949 

and  1950 Robert  D.  Collyer     331 

Pseudofins  on  the  Caudal  Peduncle  of  Juvenile 

Scombroids Earl  S.  Herald     335 

Age  and  Length  Composition  of  the  Sardine  Catch  off  the 
Pacific  Coast  of  the  United  States  and  Canada  in 
1950-51 

Frances  E.  Felix.  Anita  E.  Daugherty  and  Leo  Pinkas     339 

Notes 

The  Whale  Shark,  Rhineodon  typus,  <>ft  Northern  Baja 

California John  E.  Fitch     351 

Pacific  Cod  off  Central  California __J.  B.  Phillips  351 

Retirement  of  Harry  Cole 352 

Reviews 353 

Reports 356 


(  232  ) 


THE  DEVILS  GARDEN  DEER  HERD  ' 

(FIFTH    PROGRESS    REPORT   OF  THE    INTERSTATE    DEER    HERD  AND 
ITS   RANGE,   INCLUDING   A   SUMMATION    OF   WORK   TO   DATE) 

By     I  VII  KM  \  II      DEEE    III  RD    <  !OM  MITTE  E 
INTRODUCTION 

The  Devils  Garden  interstate  deer  herd  is  made  up  of  Rocky  Moun- 
tain mule  deer  (Odocoili  us  h(  minims  In  minims  thai  summer  principally 
on  the  Fremont  National  Fon-si  in  Oregon  and  winter  on  the  Devils 
Garden  area  in  the  Modoc  National  Forest  in  California.  The  Oregon 
slimmer  range  covers  approximately  400,000  acres  and  the  <  !alifornia  win- 
ter range  approximately  335,000  acres.  .Much  of  t lie  area  t  hat  is  classed  as 
winter  range,  however,  is  made  up  of  territory  through  which  the  deer 
merely  pass  during  migration.  The  acreage  on  which  the  deer  spend  the 
greater  part  of  the  winter  is  much  smaller,  covering  approximately 
100, ()()()  acres  Figure  94).  In  addition  to  the  animals  from  Oregon,  a 
considerable  uumber  of  deer  from  summer  ranges  in  California  also  come 
to  winter  on  this  smaller  a  rea  i  Intel-Mate  Dm-  Herd  Committee,  l!)49a). 

Earliest  records  of  livestock  use  of  the  Devils  Garden  range  extend 
back  to  1870.  During  subsequenl  \  ears  I  he  range  was  heavily  stocked.  It 
has  been  estimated  that  by  L900,  there  were  approximate^  75,000  cattle 
and  horses  using  the  area  hounded  by  M  t .  Dome  ou  the  west,  Goose  Lake 
on  the  ea.st,  and  Rlud  Lake  on  the  south.  The  thousands  of  horses  which 
remained  on  the  open  range  all  winter  were  particularly  destructive  of 
the  native  vegetation. 

In  the  1880 's sheep  grazing  began.  The  area  became  noted  as  a  winter 
and  lambing  range.  The  peak  in  sheep  use  was  reached  between  1916  and 
1920,  when  an  estimated  125.000  of  these  animals  were  present  on  the 
area  between  Mt.  Dome  and  Doublehead  Mountain.  The  range  is  capable 
of  supporting  only  a  fraction  of  that  number  today. 

Part  of  the  winter  deer  range  came  under  responsible  administration 
when  the  Modoc  National  Forest  was  created  in  1904.  But  the  most  of  the 
deer  midwinter  concentration  area  remained  public  domain  until  1920, 
when  it  was  added  to  the  national  forest.  Since  that  time  livestock  has 
been  greatly  reduced.  At  the  present  time,  limited  numbers  of  cattle  and 
sheep  are  permitted  on  the  Devils  Garden  range  during  the  regular 
spring-fall  grazing  season. 

Deer  were  reported  as  scarce  in  the  Devils  Garden  area  wThen  John 
Work  passed  through  on  his  "Fur  Brigade  to  the  Bonaventura"  in 
1832-33  (Maloney,  1945) .  Fremont  and  Applegate  reported  an  abundance 
of  deer  in  1846.  Older  residents  claim  that  deer  were  numerous  until  the 

1  Submitted  for  publication  February,  1951. 

C233) 


L':;i 


<  ALIFORNIA 


AND   GAME 


lLok""" 


-    FALL    MIGRATION    ROUTE 

SCALE 


Figure   9  4.     Location  of  the  summer  and  winter  ranges  of  the  interstate  deer  herd 

severe  winter  of  1889-1890,  after  which  for  a  time  they  practically  dis- 
appeared. Since  that  time  deer  have  increased. 

The  forage  resource  on  the  Devils  Garden  area  has  been  depleted 
considerably  by  past  grazing  abuses.  Large  areas,  which  once  supported 
stands  of  good  perennial  grasses,  now  maintain  principally  an  annual 
cover,  mostly  cheat  grass  (Bromus  tectorum). 

The  better  browse  species  have  also  suffered.  Bitterbrnsh  {Purshia 
tridt  ntata  I  is  the  most  important  browse  species  on  the  deer  winter  range 
(Hormav,  1943).  The  bitterbrnsh  stand  not  only  shows  the  effect  of 
heavy  livestock  and  deer  use.  but  has  also  been  depleted  by  fire,  drought. 
and  to  a  lesser  extenl  by  tent  caterpillars  and  rodent  girdling. 


THE   DEVILS   OARDEX   DEER   HERD 


235 


236 


CALIF!  IRN  I  \    FISH     IND  GAME 


Since  L936,  several  large  fires  have  destroyed  browse  species  on 
extensive  areas.  A  fire  history  map  \\  ill  1)"  found  in  Figure  96.  The  severe 
drought  thai  occurred  over  the  uorthwesl  from  1917  to  1936  contributed 
to  the  weakening  and  killing  of  browse  plants  on  sizable  acreages.  At  the 
present  time  there  exisl  thousands  of  acres  <>n  which  hittcrbnish  stands 
are  almosl  completely  dead. 


i-  igtjre  96.     Location  of  areas  burned  by  large  fires  on  the  Devils  Garden  winter  deer 
range.  Also  shows  areas  on  which  caterpillar  damage  is  heaviest. 

A  deer  food  problem  has  been  recognized  on  the  Devils  Garden 
winter  deer  range  for  many  years.  Modoc  forest  officers  first  observed 
abnormal  cropping  of  juniper  trees  (Juniperus  occidentalis)  in  1931. 
By  1935  this  range  depletion  was  a  cause  of  concern  to  the  forest 
administrators. 

The  forest  service  assigned  a  wildlife  technician  to  study  the  problem 
during  the  winters  of  1937-38  and  1938-39.  Studies  were  conducted  to 
determine  winter  range  boundaries,  deer  numbers,  herd  composition, 
feeding  habits,  and  migration  routes  and  dates.  As  a  result,  it  was  re- 
ported that  an  overpopulation  of  deer  was  present  on  the  winter  range, 
and  that  forage  productivity  and  carrying  capacity  were  being  seriously 
reduced  by  over-utilization  of  forage  plants.  Reduction  in  livestock  num- 
bers and  the  removal  of  surplus  antlerless  deer  were  recommended. 

The  Oregon  Game  Commission  recognized  the  need  for  action  by 
opening  the  Mule  Deer  Refuge  on  the  Fremont  National  Forest  and 
authorizing  special  antlerless  deer  seasons  in  1939,  1941  and  1943.  This 
resulted  in  the  removal  of  4,775  antlerless  deer  mostly  from  the  summer 
range  of  the  interstate  deer  herd. 


THE   DEVILS   GARDEN    DEER   HERD  237 

During  the  winter  of  1943-44,  officers  on  the  Modoc  National  Forest 
continued  their  investigation  of  the  deer-range  problem.  Checks  were 
made  of  forage  utilization,  deer  herd  movements,  herd  composition  and 
total  numbers.  They  reported  that  key  forage  species  had  been  practically 
eliminated  on  large  areas  and  that  much  of  the  remaining  stand  was  not 
able  to  reproduce  because  of  over-utilization  of  seasonal  growth.  A  reduc- 
tion of  antlerless  deer,  including  deer  that  remained  yearlong  in  Cali- 
fornia, was  recommended. 

In  1945.  the  [nterstate  Deer  Herd  <  lommittee  was  organized  to  study 
the  deer-livestock  problem  on  the  Devils  Garden  winter  deer  range.  This 
committee  is  composed  of  members  of  the  Oregon  Came  <  'inn mission,  the 
U.  S.  Forest  Service,  Regions  V  and  VI,  the  California  Division  of  Fish 
and  Game,  and  representatives  of  organized  sportsmen  ami  livestock 
growers  associations.  The  findings  of  this  committee  have  been  published 
in  progress  reports  i  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  1946,  1 !'  17,  1949b, 
1950)  of  which  this  report  is  tie-  fifth. 

The  studies  of  the  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committer  resulted  in 
adoption  of  a  plan  for  management  of  the  Devils  Garden  winter  deer 
range.  This  plan  se1  up  guides  for  regulation  of  both  deer  and  livestock 
numbers  on  the  winter  range.  In  accordance  with  this  plan,  the  number 
of  livestock  permitted  on  the  w  inter  range  by  the  Foresl  Service  has  been 
reduced.  In  October  ami  November,  1950,  special  seasons  were  authorized 
in  Oregon  and  in  California,  which  allowed  the  taking  of  antlerless  deer 
on  both  the  summer  and  winter  range  of  the  deer  herd  in  order  to  bring 
deer  numbers  into  closer  balance  with  the  supply  of  forage  on  the  winter 
range. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  fifth  progress  report  to  present  a  summation 
and  evaluation  of  methods  and  findings  of  pasl  studies,  as  well  as  an 
account  of  recent  action  and  results. 

SIZE    OF   THE    DEER    HERD 

Deer  do  not  lend  themselves  to  accurate  censusing.  A  study  made  of 
the  effectiveness  of  various  >\m  census  methods  indicated  that  none  of 
the  practical  methods  tested  was  100  percent  accurate  (Rasmussen,  1944). 
The  census  methods  used  in  the  course  of  the  studies  have  aimed  at 
approximate  rather  than  exact  numbers. 

Strip   Counts 

The  first  attempt  to  census  the  Devils  Garden  interstate  deer  herd 
was  made  by  Handle  during  the  winter  of  1937-38.  He  reported  that 
the  occurrence  of  severe  winter  weather  between  March  1-15  forced 
the  deer  herd  into  an  area  of  approximately  25,300  acres  (Figure  99a). 
A  count  of  all  deer  on  13  random  strips  covering  5,720  acres  resulted 
in  an  actual  tally  of  2,555  head.  On  the  basis  of  this  count  of  a  deer 
to  every  2.2  acres,  it  was  computed  that  the  total  deer  herd  numbered 
11,150.  Because  of  reports  that  some  deer  had  drifted  even  farther 
west  than  the  concentration  area,  Randle  considered  the  actual  number 
of  deer  in  the  herd  as  being  in  excess  of  15,000  head  (Randle,  1938). 

Strip  counts  were  resumed  by  the  Modoc  forest  staff  during  the 
winter  of  1943-44.  The  winter  range  was  divided  into  39  units,  each  of 
single  vegetation  t}-pe,  as  shown  in  Figure  97.  A  counting  strip  was 
located  through  each  unit.  Automobiles  were  used  to  count  wherever 


238 


i  Al.ll'i  >RN  I  A    FISH    AND    GAM] 


OREGON 

7 

T 

\ — 

1 
1 

6 
9A 

/            5      ^*N,*N. 

CALIFORNIA 

^A^  ^T 

] 

\CLEt 

R    LAKE 

J 

I 

1 

J 

»-/38 

'     10 

y\T 

4'               / 
3               1 

A/          \     35    \ 

1      40      1  39  if     N, 
V\           V    l\32    \. 

28 

]              I0A 

9 
II 

\     12      1 

BOUNDARY 

OF 
STRIP  COUNT 
AREA 

13 

\         ^1        3V T 

\                               /    30    ) 
\     4 1         IV   J. —      / 

/            /\29B\ 
V^V     42    /        \ 

<T   27 

29    J 

29A\ 

\  25A     \ 

27 

16         / 

14 
I4A 

26A 

26        \ 

\     23 

21 
/  11 

\   '8  / 
/    19    / 

17    \ 

20 

15       / 
1    l5B\ 

ISA  / 

0 

10  MILES 

SCALE 

Figure 


Location  of  strip  counting  units  on  the  winter  ile.-r  range  study  area 


possible,  otherwise  saddle  horses  were  used,  ('omits  were  made  at  10-day 
intervals  throughout  the  first  winter  (Fischer,  et  al..  1044   . 

The  area  of  each  strip  on  which  deer  could  be  counted  accurately 
under  prevailing  conditions  of  cover  and  topography  was  estimated. 
Counts  were  then  converted  to  deer  per  square  mile  and  applied  to  the 
entire  area  within  each  counting  unit   ( Cronemiller,  et  al..  1946). 

Based  mi  the  strip  counts,  the  deer  population  was  firsl  reported 
as  2().7()(i  head  Fischer,  el  al.,  1944)  but  Later  recomputed  at  18,000 
head  (Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  1946  . 

During  the  following  winter  (1944-45  strip  counts  were  made  in 
an  identical  manner,  but  at  monthly,  rather  than  10-day.  intervals.  The 
size  of  the  deer  population  was  reported  as  unchanged  i  Fischer,  et  al., 
1945). 

The  car  strip  census  was  continued  by  the  Interstate  Deer  Berd 
Committee  with  some  modifications.  During  the  first  three  winters 
(1945-46.  1946-47  and  1047-48)  counts  were  made  monthly  from  No- 
vember to  March,  inclusive.  But  examination  of  the  data  revealed  that 
January  was  the  month  when  the  deer  were  most  concentrated  and 
during  which  the  highest  counts  were  obtained.  During  the  winter  of 
1948-4!i.  strip  counts  were  reduced  to  two  i  December  and  January  i  and 
to  one  in  1040-50. 

The  (leer  population,  as  computed  from  the  strip  counts,  fell  from 
18,000  to  13,600  the  winter  of  1945-46.  to  12.400  the  winter  of  1946-47, 


THE    DEVILS   GARDEN    DEEK    IIKKD 


239 


ami  to  9,800  the  winter  of  1947-48.  Bu1  all  inferences  Thar  a  severe 
decline  in  deer  numbers  was  in  progress  became  shattered  during  the 

winter  of   1948-49   when   th tcurrem f  heavy  snowfalls  and  low 

temperatures  forced  the  deer  into  heavier  concentrations  similar  to  that 
reported  by  Randle  for  L938.  As  a  result,  the  computed  deer  population 
jumped  to  23,400  head. 

It  became  apparent  thai  the  strip  count  as  conducted  in  the  pasl 
could  not  be  relied  on  to  give  adequate  approximations  of  the  deer  popu- 
lation. During  mild  weather  in  open  winters  not  all  the  deer  remained 
inside  thr  boundaries  of  the  study  area.  On  the  other  hand,  it  appears 
thai  in  severe  winters,  additional  deer  are  forced  int<>  the  area.  The 
effectiveness  of  strip  counts  can  vary  considerably  nol  only  with  weather 
conditions  bul  with  the  time  of  clay  at  which  they  an-  made.  For  the 
Devils  Garden  counts,  men  had  to  assemble  from  long  distances,  so  dates 

ha<l  to  be  scheduled  in  advai Bui  ideal  counting  weather  could  no1 

be  so  scheduled.  Because  of  the  long  mileage  of  counting  strips,  the 
count  had  to  be  made  as  rapidly  as  possible  in  order  to  prevent  dupli- 
cated counts  resulting  from  deer  movements  Elence  much  counting  was 
done  at  other  than  ideal  times  of  day.  As  a  result  of  all  these  factors, 
there  w;is  discrepancy  in  the  counts.  This  became  even  more  apparenl 
during  the  following  winter  1949  50  .  when  an  incomplete  strip  count 
made  during  February,  because  roads  were  impassable  in  January,  re- 
sulted in  a  drop  to  10,200  head  Obviously,  estimates  based  on  partial 
counts  have  little  value.  A  summary  of  deer  population  as  computed 
from  strip  counts  will  he  found  in  Table  1. 

TABLE    1 
Devils    Garden    Deer    Population    Based    on    Strip    Counts 


u 

U  . 

i  'oroputed  deer 
popu 

19  ;;   IS 
1943  i  ; 
p. II   15 

1 1 .150 

• 

ISIMHI 

• 

12  100 

Incomplete) 

1  Open  winter,  di 

winter,  deer 


The  strip  count,  as  made  on  the  Devils  Garden  winter  deer  range, 
has  proven  inconsistent  as  an  indicator  of  the  true  size  of  the  deer  herd. 

The  additional  expense  that  would  he  involved,  were  steps  taken  to  cor- 
rect the  weaknesses  of  the  method,  would  probably  make  such  action 
impractical.  The  inte^sl  -n-  herd  committee  has  recommended  that 

this  type  of  censusik^uScontinued  on  the  winter  range. 

Drives 

Deer  drives  were  tried  on  a  small  scale  on  the  Devils  Garden  winter 
deer  range  during  two  winters  i  1945-46  and  1946-47  .  The  area  driven 
consisted  of  about  four  sections.  A  regular  road  strip  census  was  made 
of  this  unit  during  a  cold,  wind}  day  in  March,  l!*4*i.  No  deer  were  seen. 
A  few  minutes  later  a  drive  was  started,  ami  307  deer  were  counted 
(Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  l!'46). 


2  |d  i    VLIFORNLA    FISH    AND   QAM] 

Another  drive  of  the  same  area  was  made  the  following  winter  on 
a  warm,  slightly  cloudy  day  in  February.  Deer  were  reluctant  to  leave 
cover,  milled  about,  and  cu1  back  through  the  drivers,  making  counting 
conditions  difficult.  A  total  counl  of  594  deer,  or  1  is  per  section,  was 
obtained  (Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  1947).  Both  drives  indi- 
cated thai  the  strip  counl  method  of  counting  deer  is  ap1  to  be  conserva- 
tive unless  weather  and  feeding  conditions  are  ideal  so  that  deer  are 
freely  distributed,  rather  than  bunched  in  dense  cover. 

Aerial    Census 

An  airplane  deer  count  was  made  in  February,  1947.  The  Devils 
Garden  area  was  divided  into  seven  units  all  of  which  were  flown  in 
three  days.  Strips,  at  the  rate  of  2.7  to  the  mile,  were  flown  at  75  to  300 
feet  altitude  depending  on  vegetation  cover  types.  Buttes  were  flown 
independently  in  rising  spirals.  All  hands  of  deer  not  easily  counted 
were  photographed  with  a  "K-20"  aerial  camera  and  counted  from 
photographs. 

Because  no  attempt  was  made  to  count  deer  in  the  timbered  areas 
on  the  southern  portion  of  the  winter  range,  the  census  was  incomplete. 
The  total  count  was  4.'JoS  head  (Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee, 
1947). 

It  was  reported  that  deer  were  easily  seen  on  bare  ground  and  in 
open  brush,  and  could  be  readily  distinguished  on  areas  of  open  juniper 
cover  type,  but  that  the  animals  were  hard  to  see  in  denser  stands  of 
juniper  and  in  lava  pockets.  The  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee  plans 
to  use  the  aerial  count  wdienever  wTeather  conditions  concentrate  the 
deer  herd  in  open  terrain. 

State-line  Track   Counts 

A  dirt  road  parallels  the  boundary  line  between  Oregon  and  Cali- 
fornia. This  road  makes  a  convenient  strip  upon  which  to  count  deer 
tracks.  During  the  fall  migration,  there  is  considerable  automobile  travel 
on  the  road,  but  in  the  spring  the  road  remains  in  large  part  undis- 
turbed. The  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee  decided  to  include  among 
its  census  methods  a  count  of  deer  tracks  made  each  spring  along  the 
state-line  road  during  the  northern  migration  of  the  interstate  herd. 

The  road  has  been  divided  into  counting  units  divided  by  mileposts 
or  other  easily  distinguishable  features.  Each  unit  is  counted  every  other 
day  during  the  peak  of  the  migration  and  less  frequently  as  migration 
falls  off.  Counts  are  made  with  saddle  horses  or  jeeps.  All  southbound 
tracks  counted  are  subtracted  from  northbound  tracks.  A  brush  drag 
is  pulled  behind  a  horse,  or  a  spring-tooth  harrow  behind  a  jeep,  to 
obliterate  tracks  after  they  are  recorded  and  to  prepare  the  road-bed 
for  the  next  count. 

It  has  been  recognized  that  the  state  line  track  counts  give  only  mini- 
mum figures  of  the  number  of  deer  crossing  from  California  into  Oregon. 
It  is  difficult  to  distinguish  deer  tracks  where  the  road  surface  is  hard  or 
rocky.  Where  bands  of  deer  cross  the  road  in  single  file,  a  percentage  of 
the  tracks  will  be  obliterated.  Snowfalls  will  cover  tracks  before  they  are 
counted,  and  rains  may  wash  them  out.  For  these  reasons,  the  observers 
have  reported  that  counts  only  indicate  that  at  least  that  many  deer 
moved  across  the  state  line  during  the  counting  period. 


THE  DEVILS   GARDEN  DEER   HERD 


241 


The  first  systematic  track  count  was  made  in  the  spring  of  1947; 
counting  conditions  were  reported  as  good.  A  total  count  of  10,826  sets 
of  tracks  was  recorded.  To  this  figure  an  estimate  of  3,058  head  was  added 
to  take  care  of  (1)  animals  that  had  crossed  the  line  before  the  count  was 
made,  (2)  animals  that  crossed  after  the  count  was  discontinued,  (3) 
animals  that  crossed  west  of  the  counting  strips.  Of  the  total  obtained,  it 
was  estimated  that  12,884  were  deer  that  had  wintered  on  the  Devils 
Garden  winter  deer  range.1 

During  the  spring  of  1048,  the  counting  strips  were  extended,  as 
shown  in  Figure  102,  to  include  ;ill  migration  routes.  Adverse  weather 
seriously  hampered  activities.  Snow,  sled,  or  rain  occurred  almost  daily 
during  the  counting  period,  and  obliterated  many  deer  1  racks.  A  total  of 
9,665  sets  of  deer  tracks  was  counted.  No  estimate  of  additional  deer  was 
made. 

In  1949,  weather  conditi  »ns  were  favorable.  A  net  total  of  14,01 1  sits 
of  tracks  was  counted. 

In  1950,  the  weather  conditions  were  favorable  except  that  a  period 
of  continuous  stormy  weather,  between  May  ls1  and  7th.  occurred  during 
the  peak  of  the  migration.  It  was  estimated  that  a  minimum  of  2,000  deer 
crossed  durum-  this  week  ulcn  tracks  were  not  tallied.  A  total  count  of 
13,256  sets  of  tracks  was  recorded. 


TABLE  2 
Interstate  Deer  Numbers  Based  on  Track  Counts 


Year 

v  i  .:,;  i  o     ■ 

ate  of 
number  missed 

Total 

1947 

10,826 
9,665 

1  1.011 
13,256 

2,058 
\'.>  estimate 
\"  estimate 

2,000 

12,884 

nus 

9,665 

1949  - 

14,011 

1950- .                                 

15,256 

Table  2  summarizes  the  track  counts  by  years  during  the  four-year 
period.  Figure  98  illustrates  graphically  the  number  of  deer  migrating 
by  daily  periods. 

Because  the  track  count  is  the  only  measure  of  the  number  of  deer 
that  are  interstate  migrants,  and  is  valuable  as  a  minimum  estimate  of 
deer  numbers,  the  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee  has  decided  to  con- 
tinue the  use  of  this  census  method.  However,  it  gives  no  measure  of  the 
number  of  deer  that  summer  on  California  ranges. 

Deer  Pellet  Counts 

The  deer  pellet  count  is  more  than  a  census  method.  The  approximate 
number  of  deer  on  a  range  can  be  determined  by  this  method.  But  it  has 
an  equal,  or  more  important,  value  in  revealing  the  portions  of  a  range 
where  deer  actually  spend  their  time.  By  making  periodic  counts,  it  is 

1  Not  all  the  deer  that  migrate  from  Oregon  to  California  each  fall  end  up  on  the 
Devils  Garden  winter  deer  range.  An  unknown  number  of  interstate  deer  winter  in  the 
East  Garden.  These  animals  migrate  across  the  state  boundary  line  east  of  the  Devils 
Garden  deer  herd  counting  strips.  It  is  possible  that  some  of  these  animals  winter  in  the 
Alturas-Canbv  rim  area.  Randle  estimated  that  approximately  14,000  deer  wintered  in 
this  area  during  the  winter  of  1938-39,  but  field  observations  indicate  that  the  number  of 
deer  has  dropped  considerably  since  that  time.  This  deer  herd  which  winters  in  the  East 
Garden  is  outside  the  scope  of  the  present  cooperative  study. 


242 


i   \i  ii-ii|;\i  \    PISH    \\'i>  a  \  ME 


r::::::::::i 


Z       2 

S     •   s  ! 

ss ! : : 

sl! 

2    1 

'::•:::.::::::::;::::::::::;:  :;::::::; 


;::::::•::::::;:;;:;:;:— ~;;::r^n: 


UiUUttttU//(f/M/tf»»»»"  ■■■■■■■■    ■  ■■■ ■■ 


WWi/MW//(M/Wt»"tmm.'.:  . "  ■■    ■ '.','  v,'  v  ' '  ■  ■  ■  ■ 


r'.v,'.'.".','.'.'.'.'.v.'v.",'/?7^' 


— 


■■■■■-■■.■"'.'.■■■■.■/".■.■.■■— 


MlHON  OhutaOlw  B330  JO   Sa39wrtN 


THE    DEVILS   GARDEN*   DEER    HERD  243 

possible  to  determine  deer  movements  and  concentrations.  Also,  it  is  pos- 
sible, through  the  use  of  conversion  factors,  to  determine  the  approximate 
poundage  of  forage  consumed  by  deer  during  their  period  of  residence. 

The  method  of  making  deer  pellet  counts  has  been  described  by  Mc- 
Cain (1948).  Briefly,  a  system  of  randomized  counting  strips  is  laid  out 
on  the  unit  to  be  sampled.  Fresh  groups  of  deer  dung  found  on  the  strips 
are  counted.  Groups  left  from  previous  years  are  distinguished  by  color 
and  weathering  and  not  counted.  The  total  count  is  converted  to  deer- 
days  by  use  of  a  conversion  factor  of  12.7  -roups  to  one  deer-day,  as  de- 
termined by  Rasmusst-n  i  1943 

Ten  thousand  deer-days  can  mean  that  10, 000  deer  were  on  the  range 
for  one  day.  or  1,000  deer  for  10  days,  or  100  deer  for  a  100  days.  But  if 
the  approximate  length  of  the  period  that  deer  were  on  the  range  is  known. 
the  length  of  stay  can  be  divided  into  total  deer-days  to  give  the  approxi- 
mate deer  popidat  ion. 

Deer  pellet  counts  began  on  a  systematic  basis  on  the  Devils  ( rarden 
area  in  the  spring  of  1947.  A  total  of  155  sample  plots  was  counted.  Some 
of  the  area  now  classified  as  summer  range  was  included  in  the  sample 
unit,  and  part  of  the  area  now  included  in  the  winter  range  was  Left  out, 
so  that  the  count  is  not  directly  comparable  with  other  census  figures.  A 
total  of  2,054,000  deer-days  was  computed  from  the  count  data.  Based 
on  nne-ration  dates,  the  period  the  average  deer  spenl  on  the  winter  range 
was  estimated  at  172  days  (October  25  to  April  15).  Using  this  figure, 
the  total  population  was  computed  at   12,000  head  of  deer. 

Figure  99b  shows  the  areas  on  which  deer  concentrated  during  the 
winter  of  1946-47  as  indicated  by  the  pellet  count.  The  data  indicated 
that  58  percent  of  the  deer  range  use  had  occurred  on  18,000  acres  leaving 
the  balance  of  the  use  spread  over  322,500  acres  |  Interstate  Deer  Herd 
Committee,  1  !t47  .  No  counts  were  made  west  of  the  Alturas-Klamath 
Falls  Highway.  Subsequent  counts  show  large  numbers  in  this  area. 

In  1948,  pellet  counts  were  made  at  the  sites  of  the  new  permanent 
forage  utilization  plots  in  process  of  establishment  on  the  winter  range. 
The  counting  strip  was  fixed  at  eleven  chains  long  and  six  feet  wide,  or 
one-tenth  of  an  acre.  That  spring  183  plots,  scattered  over  338,000  acre-, 
were  counted.  A  total  of  3,857,300  deer-days  was  computed  from  the 
count  data.  The  average  length  of  stay  was  estimated  at  192  days  ( Novem- 
ber 1  to  May  10),  and  the  total  population  computed  at  20,000  deer. 

The  areas  on  which  deer  concentrated  during  the  winter  of  1947-48 
are  shown  in  Figure  99c.  It  was  indicated  that  7!»  percent  of  the  deer 
range  use  had  occurred  on  110,000  acres  |  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Com- 
mittee, 1950). 

The  most  complete  deer  pellet  count  was  made  in  the  spring  of  1949, 
when  384  plots  scattered  over  the  338,000  acres  of  winter  range  were 
counted.  A  total  of  5,299,550  deer-days  was  computed.  With  an  average 
stay  of  184  days  (October  25  to  April  27),  a  total  population  of  28,800 
deer  was  derived. 

It  was  indicated  that  45  percent  of  the  range  use  by  deer  during  the 
winter  of  1948-49  had  occurred  on  46,400  acres,  and  82  percent  of  the 
range  use  on  138,700  acres.  Concentration  areas  are  shown  in  Figure  99d 
('Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  1950). 


•_' II 


(  \i.ii(ii;\  i  a   FISH    and  <;  \  \i  i: 


rf  u«e 


LEGEND 

0-10  DEER  DAYS 
PER  ACRE 

MORE   THAN  10 

DEER   DAYS  PER  ACRE 

MORE  THAN  20 

DEER  DAYS  PER  ACRE 

MORE  THAN  30 

DEER   DAYS  PER  ACRE 


Figure  99.     Location  of  areas  on  which  deer  concentrated  during  the  years  of 
study.  See  text  for  details. 


THE  DEVILS   GARDEN   DEER   HERD  245 

In  the  spring  of  1950,  the  question  of  the  necessity  of  sampling  the 
entire  winter  range  each  season,  when  most  of  the  use  occurred  on  a  much 
smaller  area,  was  resolved  by  limiting  both  forage  checks  and  pellet 
counts  to  what  was  believed  to  be  the  key  area.  It  was  decided  that  a 
knowledge  of  trend  in  deer  numbers  and  deer  forage  utilization  on  this 
key  area  was  sufficient  for  the  deer  management  program.  As  a  result,  the 
area  sampled  was  sharply  reduced  and  the  number  of  plots  counted  was 
only  122. 

Because  pellet  counts  were  made  only  at  forage  plots  where  key 
forage  species  were  present,  several  blanks  resulted  in  the  picture  of  deer 
concentrations.  The  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee  has  derided  to 
remedy  this  defect  in  the  future. 

The  incomplete  counl  data  indicated  thai  deer  us 1  the  key  area 

during  the  winter  of  1949-50  was  only  80  percent  of  t  hat  of  the  previous 
year,  if  the  counl  data  obtained  in  1950  is  compared  with  that  obtained 
from  the  same  plots  in  L949.  The  incomplete  data  revealed  that  t  he  deer 
concentration  area  extended  to  the  easl  much  farther  than  during  the 
previous  year,  as  shown  in  Figure  99e. 

A  summary  of  the  population  data  computed  from  the  pellet  counts 
is  given  in  Table  3. 

TABLE  3 

Devils   Garden    Deer    Numbers    Based   on    Pellet   Counts 


\\  ml.  1 

Number  of  deer 

Remarks 

1946-47 

12,000 

20,000 
28,800 
23 

Incomplete  survey 

1947-48  ..                          

i.lete— 183  plots 

1948-49..-         .. 

Complete     384  plots» 

1949-50 

Incomplete  survey 

1  Statistical  analysis  of  the  1948-40  pellet  data  indicates  that  the  probabilities  were  19  out  of  20  that  the 
actual  average  number  of  pellet  groups  per  plol  (based  on  all  plots  in  all  vegetation  types)  was  within  'i'i:i  !  2.6 
groups. 

There  are  several  possible  sources  of  error  involved  in  pellet  counts. 
(1)  Deer  that  die  during  their  stay  on  the  winter  range  leave  after  them 
numbers  of  pellets  groups  that  vary  with  time  spent  alive  on  the  area. 
This  will  tend  to  make  the  computed  spring  population  too  high,  but  may 
be  satisfactory  for  the  average  winter  population.  (2)  In  hilly  or  moun- 
tainous country  a  source  of  error  lies  in  the  counting  of  pellet  groups  on 
surface  acres,  whereas  compilation  must,  without  considerable  expense, 
be  based  on  map  acres.  This  will  tend  to  make  computed  populations  low 
inversely  to  degree  of  slopes.  (3)  On  slopes,  pellets  may  be  washed  away 
or  covered  with  silt,  which  will  tend  to  make  computed  populations  low. 
(4)  In  rocky,  brushy,  or  grassy  country  some  pellet  groups  may  be  over- 
looked which  will  make  the  counts  conservative.  (5)  There  may  be  a  loss 
of  pellet  groups  through  trampling.  This  source  of  error  will  increase 
with  deer  density,  and  will  tend  to  make  the  counts  too  low.  (6)  Pellet 
groups  of  the  previous  year  may  be  counted  as  of  the  current  year.  Unless 
care  is  taken  to  overcome  this  source  of  error,  computed  populations  may 
be  much  too  high.  (7)  The  conversion  factor  of  12.7  groups  to  one  deer- 
day  may  be  higher  or  lower  than  the  true  average.  (8)  Unless  a  sufficient 


246 


i   \urui;\  l  \    risll    AND  GA  M  E 


Qumber  of  plots  are  counted  to  secure  a  feliable  sample,  the  sampling 
error  may  be  large  I  Leopold,  e1  al.,  I!'")'1  . 

Considering  thai  the  topography  on  the  Devils  Garden  winter  deer 
range  is  mostly  0a1  or  gentle,  with  only  a  few  pronounced  hills  and  buttes, 
and  thai  the  cover  tends  to  be  open  rather  than  dense,  and  that  men 
were  trained  to  distinguish  pellets  of  differenl  age  classes,  it  is  believed 
that  several  <>f  these  sources  <>l'  error  have  been  held  to  a  minimum.  The 
data  <h  rived  from  tin  1949  count,  win  n  384  />l<>ls  in  n  counted,  man  well 
In  tht  mostreliabU  approximation  to  dati  of  tin  Inn  sizt  of  tht  <-<>mhni<<l 

,h  iili,  rds.  It  is  believed  that  the  pellet  counl  t  hod  of  determining  deer 

populations  is  the  most  promising  method  used  in  the  deer  study. 

Comparison    of   Census    Data 

In  order  to  facilitate  comparison,  a  summation  of  population  data 
is  presented  in  Table  4. 

TABLE  4 
Comparison  of  Deer  Numbers  Based  on  Different  Census  Methods 


Season 

Entire  herd 

Interstate  herd 

Strip  count 

Pellet  count 

Track  count 

1946-47 

12,400 

9,800 

23.400 

10.200 

12,000 
20,000 
28,800 
23,000 

10,826 

1947-48 

9,665 

1948-49 ' 

14,011 

1 949-50 . 

13,256 

1  Year  of  deep  snow  and  concent  ration  of  deer. 

In  making  this  comparison  it  should  be  remembered  (1)  that  the 
strip  counts  covered  a  smaller  area  than  the  pellet  counts  for  all  seasons 
except  1946-47,  (2)  that  populations  computed  from  pellet  counts  for 
1946-47  and  1949-50  are  based  on  incomplete  data.  (3)  that  populations 
based  on  the  track  counts  are  for  deer  that  migrate  to  Oregon  only,  (4) 
that  the  strip  count  population  for  1949-50  was  incomplete.  The  north- 
western portion  of  the  range  could  not  be  counted  in  the  spring  of  1950 
because  roads  were  impassable. 

The  count  data  made  during  1948-49  is  the  most  complete.  The 
population  as  computed  from  the  pellet  count,  which  sampled  a  larger 
area  than  the  strip  count,  totaled  28,800  head.  When  the  pellet  data  is 
computed  on  the  basis  of  the  area  covered  by  the  strip  count,  a  popula- 
tion of  24,200  head  is  obtained.  This  may  be  compared  with  the  total  of 
23,400  head  computed  from  the  strip  count.  The  figures  are  in  close  agree- 
ment. A  total  population  of  28,000  head,  of  which  at  least  15,000  are 
interstate  migrants,  may  be  considered  as  a  close  approximation  of  the 
true  number  of  deer  in  the  herds  that  came  to  winter  on  the  Devils 
Garden  area  during  the  winter  of  1948-49. 


THE  COMPOSITION  OF  THE  DEER  HERD 

The  composition  of  the  deer  herd  wintering  on  the  Devils  Garden 
range  has  been  based  on  careful  counts  made  during  the  rutting  season 
in  late  November  and  December  when  bucks  move  freely  in  the  open. 


THE    DEVILS   GARDEN    DEER   HERD 


247 


Since  the  start  of  the  cooperative  study,  no  groups  of  deer  have  been 
included  in  the  count  unless  every  individual  in  the  group  has  been 
classified.  This  practice  tends  to  eliminate  errors  caused  by  (1)  counters 
concentrating  attention  on  unusual  deer,  such  as  large  bucks,  while  other 
animals  are  slipping  away  uncounted,  or,  conversely,  (2)  the  missing 
of  more  wary  buck  deer  that  run  off  while  other  animals  are  being  tallied. 
Counts  are  made  with  field  glasses  to  prevent  the  inclusion  of  spike 
bucks  in  the  doe  column,  to  segregate  antler  classes,  and  to  help  dis- 
tinguish large  fawns  from  small  yearlings.  Bucks  are  classified  by  antler 
classes,  yearling  does  are  not  segregated  from  mature  does. 


FIGURE   100.      Field  glasses  are  used  t,,  h.lp  the  . .1 » server  segregate  deer  into  bucks,  does 
and  lawns.  Photograph  by  U.  S.  Forest  service. 


A  comparison  of  herd  composition,  doe:  buck  and  doe:  fawn  ratios. 
and  bucks  by  antler  classes,  for  the  various  years  of  study  will  be  found 
in  Tables  .">.  (i  and  7. 

TABLE  5 
Herd   Composition   for   Years   of   Study 


Season 

Number  of 
animate 
classified 

Percentage  of  herd 

Bucks 

Does 

Fawns 

1943-44.    _    

1944-45 
1945-46 

5,986 
3,007 
1,696 
1,603 
1,736 
297' 
1,835 

8.6 
8.0 
6.4 
9.0 
8.1 
5.4 
8.1 

63.2 
55 . 0 
60.4 
57.0 
59.0 
51.2 
47.4 

28.2 
37.0 
33  2 

1946-47 

34  0 

1947-48_     _ 

32.9 

1948-49 

43  4 

1949-50 

44.5 

1  Poor  sample  due  to  stormy  weather  and  bad  road  conditions. 


248 


<    \].II'm|;\|.\    FISH    AM)   GAME 

TABLE    6 
Bucks   and    Fawns   Per    100    Does  for   Various   Years 


- 

Number  of  animals  per  100  does 

Number 

classified 

18 
■ 
20 
11 
15 
11 

ie 

14 
11 
17 

81 
L25 

103 
15 

67 
:,1 
61 
56 
85 
94 

1,262 

• 

2,882 

1,338 

5,986 

3,007 

1945-  16 

1  696 

1 .603 

1947-48 

1,736 

- 

297 

1949-50 f 

1,835 

TABLE  7 

Percentage   of   Antler    Classes   in    Buck    Population 

(Number  of  Points) 


Season 

1 

2 

3 

4 

4  + 

1943-44 

5 
9 
8 
10 
19 
25 
29 

30 
28 
26 
25 
40 
31 
42 

30 
25 
26 
22 
17 
19 
12 

28 
34 
38 
30 
18 
13 
14 

7 

1944-45 

4 

2 

1946-47 

13 

1947-48 

6 

1948-49'.      

1949-50 

12 
3 

1  The  1948-49  data  are  based  on  only  16  bucks. 

It  is  evident  from  a  reading  of  these  tables  (1)  that  the  number  of 
fawns  per  100  does  has  risen  sharply  during  the  last  two  years,  (2)  that 
the  buck  population  has  fluctuated  around  an  average  14  per  hundred 
does  during  the  last  seven  years  but  was  higher  for  1949-50,  (3)  that 
there  has  been  a  significant  increase  in  the  number  of  spiked  deer  in  the 
herd. 

It  has  been  shown  that  development  of  antlers  of  white-tailed  deer 
is  affected  by  the  quality  of  food  on  which  the  deer  must  subsist  (Sever- 
inghaus,  et  al.,  1950).  Latham  (1950)  states  that  in  Pennsylvania  "any 
spike  buck  is  an  abnormality,  reflecting  the  over-browsed  condition  of 
the  range,  and  spikes  are  common  only  when  the  animals  are  improperly 
nourished."  The  Rocky  Mountain  mule  deer  normally  may  be  expected 
to  produce  at  least  forked-horn  antlers  when  yearlings.  The  marked 
increase  in  spike  bucks  among  the  deer  wintering  on  the  Devils  Garden 
area  may  well  be  a  product  of  poor  nutrition. 

Productivity    and    Survival 

During  the  winter  of  1945-46,  12  females  were  taken  from  the  deer 
herd  for  study  purposes  and  the  following  winter  59  mature  females  and 
one  yearling.  They  were  taken  at  monthly  intervals  during  the  winter 
period.  It  was  found  that  pregnancy  could  be  determined  in  animals 
taken  after  January  14.  Of  the  49  does  examined  after  that  date,  all  but 


THE  DEVILS  GARDEN  DEER   HERD  249 

the  yearling  were  pregnant.  The  number  of  embryos  per  pregnant  doe 
was  found  to  be  1.75  (Chattin,  1948). 

The  ratio  of  175  embryos  per  100  does  was  based  on  mature  animals 
only.  Ordinarily  the  yearling  class  of  does  will  breed  during  their  second 
winter.  The  one  yearling  in  the  sample  was  hardly  representative  of  this 
class  of  breeders.  However,  The  study  did  indicate  that  the  rate  of  fawn 
conception  was  up  close  to  the  full  potential  for  Rocky  Mountain  mule 
deer. 

Losses  of  embryos  from  reabsorption.  abortion  and  stillbirth  occurs 
among  animals  in  poor  condition  as  a  result  of  malnutrition  and/or 
disease.  Assuming  that  no  such  losses  occurred  among  does  in  the  Devils 
Garden  deer  herd,  the  study  indicates  that  at  least  150  live  fawns  were 
born  for  every  100  breeding  does  in  the  herd. 

Doe  :fawn  ratios  determined  by  deer  counts  usually  are  based  on  all 
does  of  yearling  age  or  greater.  Attempts  to  segregate  yearling  from  older 
does  while  making  composition  counts  often  results  in  gross  errors. 
Among  Rocky  Mountain  mule  deer,  the  yearling  class  is  not  expected  to 
produce  fawns.  \Vha1  percent  of  the  does  breed  as  fawns  is  not  known, 
but  is  considered  negligible.  Therefore,  an  allowance  must  be  made  for 
yearlings  to  make  the  doe :fawn  ratios  comparable  directly  with  the 
potential  of  150  lawns  per  LOO  breeding  does. 

Assuming,  for  the  sake  of  discussion,  that  15  percent  of  the  doe  herd 
is  composed  of  yearlings,  the  doc  dawn  ratio  of  56  fawns  per  100  does  for 
t lie  19  17-48  season  would  indicate  t here  were  56  fawns  for  every  85  does 
of  breeding  age,  or  66  fawns  for  every  loo  mature  does  in  the  herd.  Like- 
wise the  doe  :f awn  ratio  of  94  fawns  per  LOO  does  for  the  1949-50  season 
indicates  there  were  110  fawns  for  every  100  mature  does  in  the  herd  that 
■\  inter. 

If  150  fawns  per  100  docs  were  born  during  each  of  the  years  in 
question,  the  loss  of  fawns  up  to  the  time  the  November-December  com- 
position counts  were  made  was  84  for  1947  and  40  for  1949. 

Factors    Influencing    Survival 

Forage  conditions  on  the  winter  ramie,  as  indicated  by  the  condition 
of  bitterbrush  and  juniper  browse,  have  worsened  during  this  three-year 
period.  Browse  conditions  on  the  summer  range  reportedly  have  remained 
good.  Only  two  other  influences  come  to  mind  that  have  changed  during 
the  period.  (1)  Favorable  precipitation  has  resulted  in  a  better  than 
normal  growth  of  grass  during  the  springs  of  1948  and  1949.  (2)  A  pro- 
gressive reduction  of  predators  by  use  of  the  poison  1080  had  reduced 
the  coyote  population  on  the  summer  range  to  a  very  low  density  during 
the  summers  of  1948  and  1949.  It  is  possible  that  one  or  both  of  these 
influences  may  be  responsible  for  the  recent  sharp  rise  in  fawn  survival. 

It  is  probable,  however,  that  winter  food  conditions  are  responsible 
for  the  great  loss  of  fawns  that  must  occur  on  the  range  after  the  counts 
are  made  in  early  winter.  It  will  be  seen  in  Table  5  that  fawns  made  up 
43.4  percent  of  the  deer  herd  in  late  1948.  Normally,  the  fawn  crop  may 
be  expected  to  be  made  up  of  50  percent  males  and  50  percent  females. 
In  short,  about  21.7  percent  of  the  herd  was  made  up  of  male  fawns.  Had 
all  of  these  survived,  the  percentage  of  bucks  in  the  herd  should  have 
been  much  higher  in  late  1949  than  the  8.1  percent  shown  in  the  table. 
Table  7  shows  that  spikes  and  2-point  bucks  made  up  71  percent  of  the 


I    VLIFl  IRN  l  \    1 " I r—  1 1    AND   QA  \l  I. 


total  buck  herd  in  L949.  In  other  words,  the  yearling  buck  class  made 
np  only  5.8  percenl  of  the  entire  herd.  The  difference  between  this  figure 
and  what  should  be  expected  had  all  the  1948  count  of  lawns  survived 
to  become  yearlings  indicates  thai  heavy  losses  of  lawns  are  occurring 
after  counts  arc  made.  Pawns  and  old  age  classes  of  deer  arc  the  first  to 
succumb  where  good  forage  is  in  short  supply. 

Other  life  history  data  concerning  den-  that  winter  on  the  Devils 
Garden  area  are  given  by  Chattin  1948  and  in  the  Second  Progress 
Report  of  the  Interstate  Deer  \\<'i<\  <  lommittee  (1947). 

WHAT   THE    DEER    EAT 

The  analysis  of  the  contents  of  deer  stomachs  offers  valuable  infor- 
mation on  what  deer  eat  and  when  they  eat  it.  Starting  with  the  winter 
of  1945-46,  the  contents  of  stomachs  taken  from  deer  on  the  winter  range, 
and  on  the  summer  range  in  Oregon,  have  been  analyzed.  The  findings 
are  summarized  in  Table  8,  and  are  presented  graphically  in  Figure  101. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  table  that  herbaceous  forage  is  present  in 
the  diet  the  year  round,  making  up  from   11.2  to  96.0  percent  of  the 


FEB  MAR  APR  MAT  JUNE 

MONTHS   WHEN   DEER  WERE  TAKEN 


Figure  101.     The  deer  diet  month  by  month  as  indicated  by  an  analysis  of  stomach 

samples 


THE    DEVILS    GARDEN    DEEK    HERD 


251 


•r  ci 

00 

10  — 

»  ©  0  >o  ©  ©  OS 

CI 

0) 

P 

— 1     1 

—  ci 

co 

3J10OOO1O00O10 

CO 

-  1 

re  — 

■* 

co  o 

M 

r.  —  re  c  o  —  noon 

t- 

> 

o    1 

r-  — 

_ 

X    —    —    Z    G    CI    OS    C    CI 

00 

1 

lO 

CO 

— 

IO 

Cl  o 

CI 

cs   .•  z  z  —  z  ci  ci 

00 

o 

m 

r-  — 

= 

—  c  r  n  c  r;  • ci 

CO                —          CI   — 

06 
00 

00  o 

00 

00  O  C  —   ._  DC  —  —  >'- 

C) 

a. 

•_ 

10  "-C 

,_, 

G   —  Z  '0  ~  •'■    —    -    M 

06 

- 

C< 

CI           —           —    CI 

r~ 

X 

-  10 

-r 

■z  ~  ._  ~  *„  ._■?.._  - 

© 

M 

/ 

d  — 

10 

Z    Z    '—    —    OC    '—    —   '—    ~ 

■* 

ci 

CI 

CI                  CO 

l^ 

V 

" 

E 

z 

j>> 

CI    -T 
00  b- 

to 

10 

■-  o 

Z  -r  z  z  z  z  z 

1- 

o 

O  t~  co  ©  ©  ©  — 1 

> 

"5 

re  ci 

sc 

~           CI 

CO 

>-» 

o 

4) 

- 

^  O 

o 

Z   Z  Z  Z  Z  Z    c   C- 

0 

re 

a 

10 

■  o  O  C  'C  r r~  r-  — 

*> 

3 

CI 

n 

io  — 

c 

i-s 

0> 

u 

01 

>> 

a 

=  c 

: 

"L-:ct""c" 

Q. 

W  M 

z 

—  r-  r-  z  r-  —  —  ~  cc 

— 

~ 

7 

2 

10 

10  — 

co 

o  o  os  o  c  ._  —  -  ~ 

T 

c 

u 

o 

~.   i 

,- 

~    -    Tl    ~    ~    —    -    Z    '• 

— 

0) 

*• 

z 

1- 

x 

-1 

c 

o 

o 

ic  c 

iO 

■  i    /    —    Z    Z    3    —    ~l- 

ifl 

-E 

- 

,- 

as  o 

a 

—  CCCCCCC  —  z  z 

© 

o 

10 

10 

—   CI 

•* 

ra 

~. 

E 

o 

*> 

c  — 

_ 

Tf  OS  *  ©  O  ©  U3    Ct~ 

r 

<fi 

4 

10 

~i  ci 

i> 

t~t^fr~ZZZZ~ri 

10 

0) 

£ 

1-1 

— 

~ 

ci  — 

'" 

o 
Q 

»4- 

o 

t-  t~ 

•* 

■  c  -c  '-.  z  z  z  z  z  ~ 

— 

= 

-.c 

re  io 

-' 

XiTl^ZZZZZZ 

O 

^ 

CI    — 

re 

cc  — 

>, 

L. 

CD 

£ 

E 

3 

a> 

- 

■< 

H 

a 
K 

- 
IS 
< 

a 

33 

a 

0 

*  — 

w 

-   cs 

'*■ 

-         B  ° 

m 

a 

2 

^  -7     '=  s      5 

a 

-  z.     •  -   >       — 

Q 

H 

"S  "2  -  *  >.  =  -  r  T, 

5 
= 

5= 

0 

•5  £ 

z 

PO 

TJ    bt 

-S  -  c  .=  -  :r-  •;  :-  = 

= 

■£ 

Is 

0 

"z 

o 

Z 

5  = 

1  ill ISlij 

"5 
0 

?■    r 

3tl§£»§«5 

w  — 

"^ 

IWH,y  w"Hl- 

~   =  I- 

"5  -?  06 


:-  =  — 

i     B    - 


■^ 

. 

' 

C; 

r_ci 

A 

/. 

_• 

a 

::: 


252  I   \UI  <>i;\  I A    PISH    AND  QAM] 

stomach  contents,  depending  on  the  time  of  year,  sine-  this  class  of 
forage  is  generally  more  easily  digested  than  browse,  it  is  probable  that 
grass  and  forbs  may  play  an  even  inure  important  pari  in  the  deer  diel 
than  the  data  indicate.  The  fluctuating  use  during  the  summer  months 
is  more  probably  the  resull  of  poor  sampling,  rather  than  change  in 
preference.  Dry  grass  and  forbs  (mostly  Balsamorhiza  sagittata)  are 
taken  in  the  late  fall  and  early  winter.  Some  of  this  dry  forage,  par- 
ticularly grasses,  probably  is  taken  inadvertently  in  attempts  to  nip  the 
sh  green  blades  thai  starl  to  grow  at  this  time  Herbaceous  vegetation 
may  play  a  more  vital  role  in  deer  nutrition  than  generally  is  believed  at 
present.  Bowever,  during  the  critical  periods  when  snow  covers  the 
herbaceous  forage  on  the  winter  range,  grasses  and  forbs  are  not  available 
to  deer.  For  this  reason  grasses  and  weeds  do  not  make  a  dependable 
base  for  the  regulation  of  deer  numbers. 

Snowbrush  (Ceanothus  velutinus)  appears  to  play  an  important  role 
in  the  summer  diet  of  the  interstate  deer  herd.  It  appeared  in  deer 
stomachs  from  June  to  October,  inclusive,  and  averaged  17  to  55  percent 
of  the  stomach  contents.  It  was  supplemented  by  wild  cherry  (Primus 
spp.),  mountain  mahogany  (Cercocarpus  ledifolius),  bitterbrush,  and 
squaw  carpet  (Ceanothus  prostratus). 

Bitterbrush  was  used  throughout  the  year,  with  the  exception  of 
April  and  May  when  grasses  and  weeds  made  up  most  of  the  deer  diet. 
The  use  of  bitterbrush  appears  to  be  heaviest  in  October,  when  it  aver- 
aged 34  percent  of  the  material  found  in  the  deer  stomachs.  The  stomach 
samples  indicate  that  this  use  falls  off  as  the  winter  progresses  to  1.2 
percent  in  March  and  none  in  April. 

Sagebrush  appears  as  strictly  a  winter  \\>n<\.  while  juniper  browse 
is  very  nearly  so.  As  bitterbrush  declines  in  the  deer  diet,  the  use  of  sage- 
brush and  juniper  increases.  The  reasons  for  this  shift  from  bitterbrush 
to  sagebrush  are  not  known.  Much  of  the  bitterbrush  on  the  midwinter 
concentration  area  is  moderately  to  heavily  cropped  by  January.  Aldous 
(1945)  reported  that  tips  and  bud  ends  of  bitterbrush  twigs  are  highest 
in  nutrients.  Nutrients  fall  off  in  cropped  stems.  Perhaps  this,  in  part, 
may  account  for  the  shift.  Sagebrush  is  the  most  abundant  browse  on  the 
winter  range. 

Sagebrush  has  been  reported  in  TTtah  as  about  half  as  high  for 
digestible  protein  and  twice  as  high  for  digestible  fat  and  carbohydrates 
as  is  green  alfalfa.  Chemical  analysis  indicates  it  should  be  readily 
digestible  and  nutritious  feed  (Smith,  1950a).  On  the  other  hand,  deer 
feeding  studies  in  Utah  indicate  that  deer  soon  reach  satiation  in  the 
consumption  of  sagebrush  and  turn  to  other  forage  species  unless  forced 
by  lack  of  other  forajre  to  subsist  wholly  upon  it  (Smith,  1950b).  It  was 
found  on  the  Lassen-Washoe  interstate  winter  deer  range  in  Nevada  and 
California  that  deer  have  died  as  a  result  of  malnutrition  (as  indicated 
by  bone  marrow)  on  ranges  where  sagebrush  in  all  age-classes  was 
abundant.  The  sagebrush  present  on  the  Lassen-Washoe  range  is  pre- 
dominantly big  sage  (A.  tridi  ntata).  On  the  Devils  Garden  range,  black 
sage  (A.  arhuscula  i  is  also  present  in  abundance. 

During  the  winter  of  1950-51.  a  collection  of  browse  materials  will 
be  clipped  at  monthly  intervals  so  that  chemical  analysis  for  nutrients 
can  be  made.  Perhaps  the  findings  will  throw  light  on  the  reason  why  deer 


THE  DEVILS   GARDEN  DEER  HERD  253 

change  from  bitterbrush  to  sagebrush  in  midwinter  on  the  Devils  Garden 
range. 

It  is  recognized  that  the  examination  of  the  contents  of  deer  stomachs 
will  not  always  reveal  true  food  preferences  or  exact  diets.  The  stomach 
contents  from  deer  on  depleted  ranges  will  disclose  the  forages  of  neces- 
sity rather  than  preference.  Differential  digestion  and  assimilation  are 
factors  which  must  be  considered  also.  Succulent  materials  pass  through 
the  stomach  rapidly;  dry,  woody  materials  digest  slowly  (Xorris,  1943). 
Nevertheless,  the  analysis  of  contents  of  deer  stomachs  docs  yield  knowl- 
edge of  the  feeding  habits  of  these  animals  and  provides  data  on  winch 
to  base  management. 

THE    DEER    RANGE 

Systematic  studies  of  forage  utilization  by  deer  were  started  by 
Modoc  national  forest  personnel  during  the  winter  of  1943-44.  Twenty 
line  transects  were  established  at  mechanical  intervals  in  bitterbrush 
types.  Plots  were  laid  out  in  various  Lengths  so  as  to  sample  20  bitterbrush 
shrubs  at  each  location. 

Livestock  arc  removed  from  the  Devils  Garden  area  a1  the  time  the 
first  migrant  deer  arrive  in  the  fall.  <  inversely,  deer  start  to  move  toward 
their  summer  ranges  before  livestock  are  permitted  on  the  area  in  the 
spring.  As  a  result,  it  is  a  simple  matter  to  separate  livestock  cropping 
from  cropping  by  deer. 

The  20  plots  were  checked  in  the  late  fall  to  obtain  percentage 
cropping  of  bitterbrush  by  livestock,  and  in  the  spring  to  obtain  total 
utilization.  The  difference  was  assigned  to  deer. 

The  findings  indicated  that  average  cropping  of  the  seasonal  leader 
growth  of  bitterbrush  was  64.7  percent.  It  was  reported  that  livestock 
took  28.6  and  deer  36.1  percent. 

Hormay  (1943)  found  that  <><>  percent  utilization  of  leader  growth 
was  the  most  a  bitterbrush  shrub  can  withstand  without  reduction  of 
vigor  and  seed  production.  An  over-all  average  does  not  reveal  what 
is  happening  to  individual  shrubs.  In  some  cases,  light  utilization  in 
one  area  may  outbalance  destructive  use  m  another.  The  data  must  be 
broken  down  further  in  order  to  reveal  variations  in  use.  This  was 
partially  done  for  the  bitterbrush  study.  It  was  reported  that  58  percent 
of  the  shrubs  were  overutilized  (Fischer  et  al.,  1941 1. 

After  the  interstate  deer  herd  committee  was  organized,  the  Oregon 
Game  Commission  set  out  a  new  series  of  19  plots  in  the  fall  of  1945, 
located  as  shown  in  Figure  102.  Most  of  the  plots  were  placed  farther 
north  than  those  used  in  the  earlier  study.  The  utilization  checks  revealed 
that  total  use  of  bitterbrush  averaged  80  percent.  It  was  indicated  that 
livestock  took  45.6  percent  of  the  leader  growth,  and  deer  34.4  percent 
(Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  1946). 

A  third  series  of  20  forage  plots  was  established  the  following  fall, 
1946,  by  the  California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game.  With  some  excep- 
tions, these  plots  were  located  in  the  same  area  as  the  first  study.  Both 
the  second  and  third  series  were  checked  for  utilization  during  the  winter 
of  1946-47.  The  findings  were  as  follows : 

The  second  series  yielded  an  average  use  of  74  percent,  with 

livestock  taking  49  and  deer  25  percent. 

The  third  series  yielded  an  average  use  of  73  percent,  with  live- 
stock taking  40  and  deer  33  percent. 


25 1 


(  ALIFORNl  \    PISH    AND   GAME 


Figure  102.      Location  of  forage  plots  established   timing  the  winters  of  1945-46   and 

1946-47 

The  data  indicated  that  50  out  of  every  100  shrubs  sampled  were  browsed 
60  percent  or  greater  when  livestock  left  the  range  in  the  fall.  By  the 
time  deer  left  in  the  spring,  81  out  of  every  100  shrubs  were  overbrowsed. 
1 1  was  reported  that  the  sample  was  hardly  intensive  enough  to  be  used 
as  a  base  for  management,  but  it  was  sufficient  to  show  the  need  for  a 
reduction  in  animals  using  the  winter  range  (Interstate  Deer  Herd 
Committee,  1947). 

In  addition  to  the  utilization  study  of  bitterbrush,  a  grass  utiliza- 
tion check  was  made  in  the  spring  of  1947.  Fifty  transects  were  used. 
Each  consisted  of  10  square-foot  quadrats  located  at  chain  intervals, 
along  transect  lines.  Estimates  were  made  to  the  nearest  10  percent  of  the 
amount,  by  weight,  of  the  green  growth  cropped  by  deer.  The  findings 
indicated  that  32  percent  of  the  grass  plants  in  the  sample  had  been 
cropped.  From  these,  deer  had  taken  an  average  of  17  percent  of  the 
green  leafage  as  it  appeared  at  the  time  of  sampling.  Average  utilization 
for  all  grass  plants  was  given  as  5  percent  (Interstate  Deer  Herd  Com- 
mittee, L947). 

The  findings  of  the  three  independent  studies  became  a  subject  of 
considerable  discussion  at  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee  meetings.  It 
was  admitted  that  variation  in  use  of  bitterbrush  was  great  on  the  Devils 


THE   DEVILS   GARDEN   DEER   HERD  255 

Garden  area.  A  small  number  of  plots  was  not  adequate  to  sample  this 
use.  Findings  might  vary  according  to  the  areas  in  which  plots  were 
located.  It  was  decided  to  make  a  fresh  start  in  deer-livestock  forage 
utilization  studies.  It  was  agreed  that  future  studies  would  be  cooperative 
efforts,  rather  than  done  independently  by  separate  agencies.  As  a  result 
of  these  discussions  a  plan  for  management  of  the  Devils  Garden  winter 
deer  range  was  developed  and  adopted  by  the  agencies. 

Interstate    Winter    Deer    Range    Management    Plan 

The  management  plan  recognized  that  livestock  production  is  an 
important  industry  in  .Modoc  County.  It  also  recognized  that  the  deer 
which  winter  on  the  Devils  Garden  area  are  an  important  asset  to  the 
peoples  of  both  ( !alifornia  and  ( Oregon,  and  that  the  number  of  deer  thai 
can  be  maintained  on  a  thousand  square  miles  of  summer  range  in  both 
<  >regon  and  California  is  largely  dependent  on  the  quantity  of  forage 
available  upon  the  200  square  miles  where  the  deer  concentrate  during  the 
crit  ical  months  of  February  and  March.  Taking  all  values  into  considera- 
tion, it  was  agreed  |  1  I  th;it  allowable  crops  of  key  forage  species  on  the 
winter  range  would  he  divided  between  deer  and  livestock  on  a  50/50 


BOUNDARY  OF  STUDY  AREA 


A  EVEN  NUMBERED  PLOTS 
0  ODD  NUMBERED  PLOTS 


Figure   103.      Location  of  new  forage  and  pellet  count  plots  on  the  winter  deer  range 


256  <  A.LIFORNIA    FISH    AND  <;.\  \i  I. 

basis,  2  thai  utilization  data  based  on  a  system  of  forage  plots  estab- 
lished "ii  the  \\  inter  range  would  be  accepted  by  ;ill  the  agencies  as  a  true 
index  of  forage  use,  3  thai  adjusl  ments  in  numbers  of  livestock  and/or 
deer  would  be  based  on  nerd  and  made  on  the  basis  of  three-year  running 

averages  of  forage  utilization.  It  was  agr I  to  apply  the  best  principles 

of  livestock  and  deer  managemenl  to  the  area  ...  in  order  to  balance 
the  combined  use  of  livestock  and  deer  with  average  forage  production  of 
the  range  .  .  .  so  thai  the  trend  in  forage  depletion  would  be  reversed 
and  range  conditions  maintained  or  improved  for  the  future  I  Interstate 
Den-  Berd  <  lommittee,  1949a). 

The    New    Forage    Plots 

The  California  Forest  and  Range  Experiment  Station  was  called  on 
for  assistance  in  sampling  the  range  vegetation.  It  was  planned  to  use 
400  plots.  100  in  each  of  the  four  main  range  vegetation  types  that  occur 
on  the  winter  range.  Tim  plots  were  designed  to  furnish  information  not 
only  on  current  forage  utilization,  but  also  to  give  data  on  ground  cover- 
age and  vegetation  composition  which  may  be  used  as  a  base  from  which 
to  measure  future  changes. 

Two  hundred  plots  were  established  in  the  fall  of  1947,  and  the 
balance  was  located  the  following  summer.  A  full  description  of  the 
method  will  be  found  in  the  third  progress  report  (Interstate  Deer 
Herd  Committee,  1949b).  Briefly,  each  plot  consists  of  a  200-foot  line 
along  which  20  segments,  each  25  inches  long,  were  measured  by  the 
line-interception  method  (Canfield,  1939  and  Hormay,  1949).  Plots 
were  located  at  predetermined  intervals  along  the  roads,  truck  trails, 
and  ways  that  reach  into  most  areas  on  the  winter  range.  The  locations 
of  the  plots  are  shown  in  Figure  103. 

Condition   of  the   Ground   Cover 

A  full  analysis  of  the  ground  cover  and  percentage  composition  of 
the  vegetation,  as  indicated  by  the  forage  plots,  will  be  found  in  the 
fourth  progress  report  (Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  1950).  A 
breakdown  of  the  principal  elements  will  be  found  in  Table  9. 

The  table  shows  that  the  percentage  of  the  ground  covered  with 
vegetation  available  for  deer  or  livestock  is 

28.4  in  the  pine-bitterbrush  type 

37.0  in  the  sagebrush  type 

31.7  in  the  juniper  type 

37.4  in  the  grassland  type 

In  addition  to  this  cover,  an  overstory  of  juniper  trees  occurs  in  the 
juniper  vegetation  type  and  an  overstory  of  coniferous  trees  and  some 
stands  of  unavailable  mountain  mahogany  and  wild  cherry  occur  in  the 
pine-bitterbrush  type. 

Of  the  available  browse  species  present,  sagebrush  is  most  common 
and  abundant.  Sagebrush  makes  up 

3.9  percent  of  available  vegetation  in  pine-bitterbrush  type 

56.1  percent  of  available  vegetation  in  sagebrush  type 

31.6  percent  of  available  vegetation  in  juniper  type 
4.9  percent  of  available  vegetation  in  grassland  type 


THE  DEVILS   GARDEN  DEER   HERD 


257 


TABLE   9 

Principal   Elements  of  Vegetation  on  Winter  Deer  Range 

(Based  on  396  Forage  Plots  :  198,000  Inches  of  Line  Intercepts) 


Frequency 
of  occur- 
rence, plots 

Percentage  of  total 

fegetation  coverage 

Species 

Pine- 
bitterbrush1 

Sagebrush 
type 

Juniper 
type1 

Grassland 
type 

290 
349 

4.88 
5.31 

4.65 
7.31 

15.06 
13.36 

33.74 

32.18 

10.19 

39.31 
12.44 

11.96 

18.82 
5.89 

28.42 

26.09 
2.30 

65.92 

19.58 

4.51 

61.94 

.      14.42 
3.89 
1.17 
0.49 
0.88 
3.05 
11.32 
2.84 

36.67 

3.23 
56.11 
0.11 
0.00 
0.00 
3.18 
0.06 
0.64 

56.81 

3.60 
31.59 
2.45 
0.13 
0.16 
4.45 
0.00 
0.81 

90.01 

113 

217 

37 

6 

8 

119 

•11 

0.10 

4.95 

0.00 

Cherry  (bitter  and  choke) 

0.00 
0.00 

4.81 

0.00 

0.13 

38.06 
100.00 

28.4 

63.33 

100.00 

37.0 

43.19 
100.00 

31.7 

9.99 

396 

100.00 

Total     percentage     of     ground 

37.4 

1  An  overstory  of  juniper  occurs  in  the  juniper  type  and  an  overstory  of  trees  occurs  in  the  pine-bitter- 
brush  type. 

Bitterbrush  is  the  next  most  abundant  browse  on  the  winter  range. 
Of  the  available  living  vegetation,  bitterbrush  makes  up 
14.4  percent  in  the  pine-bitterbrush  type 

3.2  percent  in  the  sagebrush  type 

3.6  percent  in  the  juniper  type 

0.1  percent  in  the  grassland  type 

The  survey  also  measured  the  coverage  of  dead  browses  that  were 
still  in  place  on  the  winter  range.  Of  the  total  stand  of  bitterbrush  (dead 
and  alive)  it  was  found  that 

41  percent  was  dead  in  the  pine-bitterbrush  type 

33  percent  was  dead  in  the  sagebrush  type 

48  percent  was  dead  in  the  juniper  type 

The  amount  of  bitterbrush  that  occurs  as  scattered  shrubs  in  the 
grassland  type  is  negligible. 

Form   Classes  of   Key   Browses 

When  shrubs  and  trees  are  not  browsed,  or  only  lightly  browsed, 
they  tend  to  assume  the  natural  shapes  which  are  normal  for  each  species. 
As  intensity  of  browsing  increases,  the  departure  from  these  normal 
forms  becomes  more  striking.  Continued  heavy  browsing,  year  after 
year,  results  in  tightly  hedged  or  high-lined  and  partly  dead  browse 


258 


(  ALIFORN  I A    IIH  I    AN  D   OA  M  E 


ill  tiulitlv  t».  ' l^«< I  l> 


irbrowsing 


plants  that  stand  out  as  evidence  of  poor  range  condition  and  declining 
forage  yield  (Dasmann,  1951  i. 

A  classification  of  the  forms  of  bitterbrnsh  shrubs  and  juniper 
trees  on  133  plots  on  the  key  area  was  made  in  1950.  Degree  of  hedging 
was  broken  down  into  (1  )  little  or  no  hedging,  (2)  moderately  hedged, 
and  (3)  heavily  hedged.  Availability  of  forage  was  classed  as  (1)  all 
available,  (2)  largely  available,  (3)  mostly  unavailable,  and  (4)  un- 
available. 

It  was  found  that  30.7  percent  of  the  bitterbrnsh  shrubs  and  33.9 
percent  of  the  available  juniper  trees  were  heavily  hedged.  The  full 
findings  are  given  in  Table  10. 

TABLE    10 
Form    Classes   of    Bitterbrush    and   Juniper 


Percentage  of  stand  in 
each  class 


1.  All  available,  little  or  no  hedging 

2.  All  available,  moderately  hedged 

3.  All  available,  heavily  hedged - 

4.  Partly  available,  little  or  no  hedging 

5.  Partly  available,  moderately  hedged 

6.  Partly  available,  heavily  hedged 

7.  Mostly  unavailable 

8.  Unavailable1 


100.0 


Includes  only  living  plants. 


THE   DEVILS   GARDEN   DEER   HERD 


259 


Age   Classes   of    Key    Browses 

The  absence,  or  scarcity,  of  one  or  more  age  classes  from  a  stand  of 
vegetation  gives  cause  for  deliberation.  This  is  especially  so  when  younger 
age  classes  are  scarce  even  though  older  stands  are  dying  out.  Unless 
there  has  been  a  recent  change  in  such  site  conditions  as  climate  and 
soil,  the  absence  of  younger  age  classes  from  a  stand  will  often  indicate 
overcropping  by  range  animals.  The  younger  age  groups  of  preferred 
browse  species  are  particularly  susceptible  to  losses  resulting  from  over- 
cropping. 

To  determine  the  age-factor  of  the  stand  of  bitterbrush  and  juniper 
on  the  winter  range,  these  browses  were  classified  as  either  seedlings, 
young  plants,  mature  plants,  or  decadent  plants.  It  was  found  that 
1.0  percent  of  the  bitterbrush  sampled  was  seedlings 
15.4  percent  of  the  bitterbrush  sampled  was  young  plants 
55.6   percent  of  the  bitterbrush  sampled  was  mature  plants 
28.0   percent  of  t  he  bitterbrush  sampled  was  decadent  plants 

The  balance  between  age  classes  of  juniper  trees  was  more  even, 
as  is  shown  in  Table  11. 

TABLE    11 
Age  Classes  of  Bitterbrush  and  Juniper 


Percentage  <>f  stand  in 
each  class 


Seedlings 

Young  plants. 
Mature  plants. 

Per.'ulcnt   plant:- 


100.0 


The  fact  that  30  percent  of  the  bitterbrush  stand  was  revealed  as 
heavily  hedged,  and  that  nearly  twice  as  many  shrubs  are  in  the  decadent 
class  as  are  in  the  seedling  and  young  plaid  categories,  indicates  that 
forage  depletion  is  still  in  progress  on  the  Devils  Garden  area. 

Forage    Utilization 

The  grasses,  forbs,  and  browses  on  forage  plots  are  checked  for 
utilization  each  fall  and  spring  by  work  teams  composed  of  representa- 
tives of  all  the  agencies.  Utilization  of  grasses  is  estimated  by  the  height- 
weight  method  (Lommasson  and  .Jensen,  1942).  Percentage  cropping 
of  browses  is  estimated  by  the  method  described  by  Hormay  (1943), 
except  that  juniper  twig  utilization  is  actually  measured  on  tagged 
twigs.  Use  of  forbs  is  estimated  on  a  percentage-volume  basis. 

Utilization  data  on  all  plants  except  annuals  were  taken  during 
the  first  two  years  of  the  study  (1947-48  and  1948-49).  It  was  found  that 
grasses  were  commonly  cropped  by  deer,  and  rather  heavily  on  limited 
spots,  but  that  average  utilization  was  light.  The  blue  grasses  (Poa 
secunda  and  nevadensis)  appeared  to  be  most  relished  and  were  most 
heavily  used  (4.5  percent  in  1947-48).  Needle  grasses  (Stipa  columbiana 


I    \l  IH>K\  i  \    fimi    AND   GAM] 


i 


H& 


* 


feM  ( 


Figure  105.     Evolution  of  a  deer  browse  line  on  juniper  trees 
U.  S.  Forest  Service  photos 


THE  DEVILS  GARDEN  DEER   HERD  261 

and  elmeri)  were  next  in  degree  of  use  with  an  average  cropping  of  2.9 
percent  of  the  green  leafage  in  1947-48. 

Arrowleaf  balsamroot  (Balsamorhiza  sagittata)  appeared  as  the 
most  heavily  cropped  forb  that  covered  more  than  0.1  percent  of  the 
ground  surface  of  the  winter  range.  But  by  fall  the  cropping  of  balsam- 
root  only  averaged  3  percent.  Time-consuming  utilization  checks  on 
grasses  and  forbs  were  discontinued  after  1948-49. 

Among  the  browses,  bitterbrush  appeared  as  by  far  the  most  heavily 
cropped  shrub,  with  juniper  second  in  degree  of  use.  Sagebrush  fell 
fourth,  the  cropping  of  rabbitbrush  being  somewhat  heavier.  Because 
cropping  of  bitterbrush  and  juniper  was  much  greater  than  the  use  of 
other  forage  species  mi  the  range,  it  appeared  obvious  that  if  animal  num- 
bers were  kept  at  levels  at  which  these  browses  received  no  more  than 
proper  use,  no  other  forage  species  would  generally  be  overutilized.  For 
this  reason,  bitterbrush  and  juniper  were  chosen  as  key  forage  species. 
Starting  in  1949-50,  utilization  checks  have  been  confined  to  key  species 
on  key  areas,  except  that  other  browses  are  checked  where  they  occur  on 
plots  on  which  key  species  are  present. 

One  rough  index  of  the  relative  importance  of  various  forage  species 
in  the  diet  of  deer  can  be  compiled  by  multiplying  the  amount  present  on 
the  range  by  the  amount  that  was  eaten,  in  other  words,  percentage  of  the 
ground  covered  by  the  species  by  average  percentage  cropping.  This  was 
done  with  bitterbrush,  sagebrush  and  rabbitbrush  as  they  occur  on  the 
deer  concentration  area.  The  index  of  their  relative  importance  in  the 
deer  diet  during  the  1949-50  winter  season  was  computed  as 

74  for  bitterbrush 
65  tor  sagebrush 
20  for  rabbitbrush 

An  index  for  juniper  could  not  be  computed  because,  as  yet,  no  good 
figure  on  relative  ground  covered  by  all  classes  of  available  juniper 
browse  has  been  determined. 

Evaluation    of    Range    Survey    Procedures 

The  principal  sources  of  error  that  may  influence  both  forage  in- 
ventories and  forage  utilization  checks  are  (1)  unrepresentative  or  biased 
sample  plots  and  (2)  biased,  or  inaccurate  measurements  or  estimations 
by  range  examiners.  Steps  were  taken  to  reduce  these  sources  of  error. 

A 1 1  hough  the  sample  plots  were  set  out  at  predetermined  mechanical 
intervals  along  established  base  lines,  and  are  not  strictly  randomized,  it 
is  believed  they  do  yield  a  representative  sample.  The  topography  of  the 
area  tends  to  be  gentle ;  hence  the  roads  and  ways  are  not  mostly  located 
on  ridge-tops  or  valley  bottoms  as  is  apt  to  be  the  case  where  topography 
is  more  pronounced.  Initial  points  of  the  line  transects  were  set  50  feet 
from  the  roads  so  as  to  eliminate  the  immediate  influence  of  the  passage- 
ways. Plots  were  run  at  right  angles  to  the  road  at  point  of  departure  so 
as  to  reduce  the  bias  of  selection. 

As  for  the  range  examiners,  the  men  that  assemble  each  season  to 
check  the  plots  train  together  before  the  actual  work  starts  in  order  to 
standardize  measurement  and  estimation  procedures  and  to  level  off  indi- 
vidual bias.  While  a  certain  amount  of  error  due  to  all  sources  does  exist, 
it  is  believed  that  it  is  not  great.  Statistical  analysis  of  the  data  on  total 


262 


(  AL1F0RXIA    FISH    AND   GAME 


bitterbrush  cropping  for  the  1949-50  season  indicates  the  probabilities 
are  19  oul  of  20  thai  the  true  average  lies  within  11 .7  percenl  of  the  com- 
puted average. 

BITTERBRUSH    BASE    AREA 

Both  the  range  vegetation  survey  and  general  observations  reveal 
that  there  are  extensive  acreages  of  winter  range  on  which  bitterbrush  is 
scarce.  <  Iropping  of  bitterbrush  is  generally  much  heavier  where  it  occurs 
as  scattered  plants.  To  reduce  stocking  to  a  level  where  these  sparse  stands 
would  be  properly  used  is  qo1  practical.  It  was  decided  to  sacrifice  bitter- 
brush on  areas  where  this  species  naturally  was  scarce  or  where  it  was 
heavily  depleted.  It  was  planned  to  base  reductions  in  numbers  of  deer 
or  livestock  on  utilization  of  bitterbrush,  the  key  forage  species,  only 
where  it  occurred  in  sufficient  abundance  to  make  management  practical. 
The  area  of  which  this  is  true  is  called  the  bitterbrush  basi  area.  Else- 
where, juniper  is  regarded  as  the  key  forage  species  for  deer.  This  is 
called  the  juniper  bust  area.  The  location  of  these  areas  is  shown  in 
Figure  103. 

Three-Year   Utilization  of   Key   Forage   Species 

As  -was  stated  above,  the  agencies  concerned  with  managing  the 
Devils  ( iarden  deer  herd  and  its  range,  agreed  that  adjustments  in  levels 
of  stocking  would  be  based  on  utilization  of  key  forage  species  over  three- 
year  periods.  The  reason  for  the  use  of  three-year  averages  is  that  the 
management  plan  seeks  to  base  stocking  on  trends  in  range  condition 
rather  than  on  the  effect  of  exceptionally  good  or  bad  growth  years. 

Bitterbrush 

The  first  three-year  period  began  with  the  season  of  1947-48  and 
ended  with  that  of  1949-50.  During  these  three  seasons  the  cropping  of 
bitterbrush  on  the  bitterbrush  base  area  by  livestock  has  gradually  light- 
ened, while  the  use  by  deer  has  become  heavier.  This  is  shown  in  Table  12. 
The  percentage  of  the  stand  which  is  subject  to  overbrowsing  also  has 
increased  during  the  three-year  period.  It  has  gone  up  from  30  percent 
in  1!»47-4S  to  40  percent  in  1949-50.  This  is  shown  in  Table  13. 

TABLE    12 
Average   Cropping   of    Bitterbrush   for   Three   Years1 


Class  of  animals 

Average  percentage  cropping 

1947-48 

1948-49 

1949-50 

3-year 
average 

20.1 
16.2 

18.4 
21.5 

13.4 
27.5 

17.3 

Deer 

21.7 

Total... 

36.3 

39.9 

40.9 

39.0 

1  A  sizable  fraction  of  the  bitterbrush  plots  used  in  early  studies  were  located  in  areas  on  which  bitterbrush 
is  now  sacrificed.  Most  of  the  other  plots  were  located  in  areas  where  use  of  bitterbrush  is  also  normally  heavy. 
For  this  reason  the  utilization  averages  derived  from  early  studies  are  much  higher  than  the  averages  based  on  plots 
scattered  over  the  entire  bitterbrush  base  area. 


THE   DEVILS   GARDEN    DEER    HKK1) 


26:} 


TABLE    13 
Percentage  of  Plots  on  Which   Bitterbrush  Cropping  Was  60  Percent  or  Heavier 


Season 

Fall 

Spring 

10 
13 
12 

30 

34 

40 

} 

s 

"J 

k 

• 

\ 
] 

[ 

* 

r-^JL- 

■r   BIT1LR8RUSH 
BASE    AREA 

0RCC0M 
CiLlfORN 


Figure   106.      Location  of  bitterbrush  plots  on  which  cropping  averaged  60  percent  or 
greater  ta)  after  livestock  left   tie-  range  in  1 1 1 . •  fall  and  (b)  after  deer  lefl  the  follow- 
ing spring  (1949-50) 

Aii  analysis  of  the  ground  cover  data  on  bitterbrush  indicated  that 
8  percent  of  the  stand  of  living  bitterbrush  present  on  the  bitterbrush 
base  area  when  the  surveys  were  made  had  died  since  the  plots  were 
measured  in  1947  and  1948.  This  is  far  in  excess  of  the  present  rate  of 
natural  reproduction,  and  is  at  least  partially  a  result  of  overbrowsiiii:. 

Since  the  areas  on  which  it  is  thought  practical  to  sacrifice  bitter- 
brush have  been  excluded  from  the  bitterbrush  base  area,  the  sizable  per- 
centage of  the  stand  subjected  to  damaging  use  is  of  considerable  signifi- 
cance. While  a  certain  amount  of  overcropping  is  usually  unavoidable 
on  even  the  best  managed  ranges,  it  is  believed  that  when  such  a  large 
and  increasing  percentage  of  the  stand  is  subjected  to  overcropping  there 
is  need  for  immediate  reduction  in  the  number  of  animals  using  the 
winter  range. 

Juniper 

Cropping  of  juniper  fluctuated  during  the  three-year  period.  The 
percentage  of  available  growth  cropped  by  deer  averaged 
14.0  percent  in  1947-48 

22.2  percent  in  1948-49 

12.3  percent  in  1949-50 


2—41374 


26  1  '   Al.ll'i  IRN  IA     11-11      \\l>    (,  \  \l  I 

Utilization  was  heaviesl  during  the  severe  winter  of  1948-49.  This 

was  to  I spected,  since  juniper  is  to  some  extent  an  emergency  food 

which  is  taken  by  deer  more  during  periods  of  bad  weather  when  they  are 
bunched  in  cover.  Use  of  juniper  by  livestock  is  negligible. 

The  tolerance  of  juniper  to  browsing  has  not  been  determined  by 
published  studies.  Aldous  (1943  found  thai  northern  white  cedar 
(Thuja  occidentals  could  no1  maintain  growth  of  browse  if  more  than 
25  percent  of  its  foliage  was  removed  annually.  Juniper  is  a  more  open- 
growing  tree  than  northern  white  cedar,  and  its  capacity  to  regenerate 
growth  on  lower  branches  may  be  somewhal  higher,  although  it  is  very 
slow. 

The  studies  revealed  that  the  percentage  of  the  plots  on  which  the 
average  use  of  juniper  was  higher  than  25  percent  was  as  follows  for  the 
different  years : 

19 17-48 17  percent 

1948-49   _  29  percent 

1949-50 ___11  percent 

Sagebrush    and    Rabbitbrush 

Cropping  of  sagebrush  averaged  9.1  percent  on  the  plots  examined 
during  1949-50.  Livestock  took  0.2  and  deer  8.7  percent  of  the  leafy 
growth.  Rabbitbrush  cropping  averaged  13.9  percent,  of  which  livestock 
took  2.8,  rodents  2.4,  and  deer  8.3  percent  during  the  1949-50  season. 

REDUCTION    PROGRAM 

The  range  studies  consistently  have  indicated  the  need  for  a  reduc- 
tion in  stocking  by  deer  and  livestock  on  the  Devils  Garden  area,  if  the 
demand  for  food  is  to  be  balanced  against  the  supply  of  allowable  forage. 
In  order  to  halt  range  depletion,  and  insure  a  continuing  supply  of  good 
range  forage  for  the  future,  steps  have  been  taken  to  reduce  livestock  use 
of  the  area  and  to  increase  the  hunter  harvest  of  deer. 

Reduction   of   Livestock 
Cattle  and  Sheep 

During  the  three-year  period  terminating  with  the  season  of  1949-50, 
the  use  of  the  Devils  Garden  winter  deer  range  by  livestock  has  been 
reduced.  This  is  reflected  in  the  decreasing  amount  of  bitterbrush  crop- 
ping by  livestock. 

The  number  of  livestock  that  graze  on  national  forests  can  be  ex- 
pressed in  three  ways,  i.e.,  obligations,  permitted  use,  and  actual  use. 
Stockmen  ( 1)  who  were  using  the  public  lands  prior  to  the  creation  of 
the  national  forests,  (2)  who  had  established  ranch  headquarters,  (3) 
who  possessed  sufficient  outside  range  to  feed  their  stock  without  damage 
to  the  resource  during  periods  when  stock  was  not  permitted  on  the 
national  forest  lands,  and  (4)  who  were  United  States  citizens  were 
granted  the  preference  of  receiving  grazing  privileges  on  national  foresl 
lands.  During  subsequent  years,  preferences  have  been  granted  to  home- 
steaders and  others  who  met  certain  requirements.  These  grazing  privi- 
leges are  considered  as  obligations  by  the  Forest  Service. 

National  forest  permittees  who  hold  grazing  preferences  often,  for 
various  reasons,  do  not  apply  to  graze  full  numbers  each  year.  Hence  the 
number  permitted  during  any  one  year  may  vary  considerably  from  the 


THE  DEVILS   GARDEX   DEER   HERD 


265 


number  obligated.  After  receiving  his  permit,  a  permittee  may  decide  to 
graze  fewer  animals  or  to  graze  for  a  lesser  period  than  the  permit  speci- 
fies. Hence  actual  use  may  be  different  from  permitted  use.  Also  number 
of  livestock  allowed  on  the  forest  on  a  temporary  year-to-year  basis,  and 
livestock  permitted  because  of  privately  owned  lands,  serves  to  confuse 
the  question  of  livestock  numbers.  For  instance,  the  livestock  data  given 
in  the  published  management  plan  (Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee, 
1949a)  is  based  on  actual  use.  This  will  differ  from  the  data  found  in 
Table  14,  which  is  based  on  obligations.  It  is  believed  that  the  number  of 
livestock  covered  by  obligations  makes  the  logical  base  on  which  to  com- 
pute increases  and  decreases  of  livestock  on  the  winter  deer  range. 

The  obligations  for  the  winter  range  for  1946  and  1950  are  given  as 
follows  : 

1946 20,542  animal  anil  months1 

1950 17,404  animal  unit  months 

This  represents  a  15.3  percent  reduction  in  livestock  grazing  obli- 
gations. 

TABLE    14 
Livestock   Obligations   on   the    Devils   Garden    Winter    Deer    Range 


Allotment 


Percent 
within 
winter 
range 


1946 


Animal 
unit  months 


1950 


Head' 


Animal 
unit  months 


Casuse 

Clear  Lake  Spring 

Hackamore 

Hog  Lake.. 
Lava  Bed  Winter. 
North  Badger-  _    - 

South  Badger. . 

Boles  Meadow 
Dry  Luke    . 
Howard  Gulch 

Mowitz 

Potter  Pasture 

Timber  Mountain 


100.0 
100.0 

47.6 
27.4 
14.9 
100.0 
100.0 
46.6 
82.4 
11.7 
100.0 
100.0 

46.2 


1,250  S 

12,750  S 

630  C 

595  S 

247  S 

745  S 

1,125  S 

1,250  S 

1,398  C 

190  C 

90  C 

350  C 

470  C 

53  C 


500 

476 

197 

373 

900 

1,000 

4,753 

1,051 

406 

1,750 

1,880 

263 


1,250  S 

11,350  S 

530  C 

524  S 

329  S 

745  S 

1,000  S 


900 

1,277 

231 

55 

300 

470 

578 

7 


17,962  S 
3,181  C 


20,542 


16,676  S 
2,870  C 


500 
4438 

419 

110 

373 

800 

720 

4,889 

1,302 

266 

1,500 

1,880 

207 


17,404 


1C:  Cattle,  S:  Sheep. 


Wild    Horses 

A  wild  horse  problem  has  been  present  on  the  winter  range  for  years. 
Attempts  are  made  to  keep  down  the  wild  horse  population  by  periodic 
removals.  By  1946,  wild  horses  had  again  built  up  to  numbers  that  made 
considerable  use  of  the  range  forage.  During  April  and  May,  1946,  under 
an  order  issued  by  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture,  287  horses  were  removed 
from  the  range.  These  horses  had  used  the  range  yearlong,  consuming 
over  3,400  horse-months  of  forage  each  year.  The  removal  of  these  animals 
has  reduced  the  pressure  for  forage  on  the  winter  range  and  has  resulted 

1  An  animal  unit  month  is  a  measure  of  livestock  range  use.  It  means  that  one 
mature  cow  with  her  calf  has  grazed  for  one  month.  Sheep  use  is  converted  to  animal 
unit  months  at  the  ratio  of  five  sheep  to  one  cow. 


266  (  ALIFORNl  \    PISH    AND  GA  M  E 

in  increasing  the  supply  of  food  for  other  classes  of  range  animals  I  Inter- 
state Deer  Herd  ( lommittee,  L9  17  . 

Deer 

I  in nn -  the  winter  of  1!'  17  18,  an  attempl  was  made  to  remove  some 
of  tli-'  surplus  deer  tn  trapping  and  transplanting.  .Montana  corral  type 
traps  were  used.  All  traps  had  catch  pens  and  Loading  chutes  attached. 
Trapped  dm-  were  transported  in  pickup  trucks  to  a  Large  barn  where 
they  were  held  until  enough  accumulated  to  make  a  two-ton  truckload. 

Success  in  the  trapping  venture  was  hampered  by  dil'lienlties  in 
obtaining  materials  for  construction  of  traps. 

During  the  period  between  January  7  and  April  10,  72  deer  were 
trapped.  Of  this  number  49  were  transplanted  to  other  areas,  nine  died, 
and  1  I  escaped.  This  resulted  in  the  removal  of  58  deer  from  the  winter 
range  I  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee,  1949b). 

Current  Reduction   Program 

Application  of  the  three-year  reduction  formula,  based  on  bitter- 
brush  utilization,  indicated  that  a  further  reduction  in  livestock  and  a 
considerable  increase  in  the  deer  harvest  was  needed  to  bring  the  level  of 
stocking  into  closer  balance  with  forage  production  on  the  winter  range. 
It  wras  decided  that  since  the  level  of  range  use  which  prevailed  dur- 
ing 1M47-48  resulted  in  overbrowsing  of  30  percent  of  the  bitterbrush 
stand,  the  amount  of  cropping  that  should  be  considered  allowable  obvi- 
ously should  be  less  than  that  of  1947-48.  On  the  other  hand,  it  was 
believed  advisable  to  make  gradual  reductions  on  an  experimental  basis 
rather  than  to  make  drastic  cuts.  With  this  in  mind,  it  was  decided  to 
accept  34  percent  cropping  as  the  average  use  of  bitterbrush  that  would 
be  allowed  on  the  winter  range. 

The  three-year  formula  was  applied  as  follows : 

Livestock      Deer 

Three-year  average  cropping 17.3         21.7 

Allowable  average  (50/50) __  17.0         17.0 

Overuse  _  0.3  4.7 

Percentage  reduction  of  animals  needed       2  20 

It  was  planned  to  make  the  2  percent  reduction  in  livestock  use  on 
the  deer  winter  concentration  area  where  it  is  most  needed.  A  reduction 
of  108  animal  unit  months  is  indicated. 

Again,  because  of  the  experimental  nature  of  antlerless  deer  hunts 
in  California,  it  was  decided  to  apply  the  20  percent  reduction  figure  to 
a  number  of  deer  equal  to  the  Oregon  migrants,  or  15,000  head,  and  leave 
the  balance  of  the  deer  on  the  range  to  serve  as  a  safety  factor.  This 
resulted  in  a  planned  reduction  of  3,000  antlerless  deer.  Accordingly, 
special  antlerless  deer  hunting  seasons  were  opened  in  Oregon,  on  October 
18-19, 1950,  and  in  California,  from  November  4  to  12,  inclusive,  in  order 
to  allow  the  removal  of  1,500  antlerless  deer  in  each  state. 

THE  ANTLERLESS   DEER    HUNT 

Considerable  opposition  developed  in  California  against  the  Devils 
Garden  antlerless  deer  season.  California  has  had  a  buck  law  since  1883. 
Only  two  other  antlerless  deer  seasons,  one  on  Santa  Catalina  Island 
during  1949-50  and  one  on  the  Mineral  King  federal  game  refuge  in  1  950, 


THE  DEVILS   GARDEN  DEER   HERD  267 

have  been  held  in  this  State  As  a  result  many  people  are  unaware  of  the 
need,  and  the  value,  of  harvesting  surplus  deer  whether  male  or  female. 

Were  it  not  for  the  active  support  of  the  local  organizations  of 
sportsmen  and  stockmen,  as  well  as  state-wide  organizations,  who  are 
represented  in  the  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee  and  or  were  aware 
of  the  facts  in  the  case,  it  is  probable  the  bunt  would  have  been  cancelled. 
fn  general,  the  persons  best  informed  have  been  in  support  of  managing 
the  deer  herd  that  uses  the  Devils  ( harden  winter  deer  range.  They  realize 
that  unless  a  deer  herd  is  kept  in  balance  with  the  supply  of  good  forage 
on  its  range,  wasteful  losses  occur. 

As  it  turned  out  the  antlerless  deer  hunts  were  quite  successful. 
Xo  hunting  accidents  occurred  and  there  was  little  law  violation.  The 
participants  represented  a  cross-section  of  the  hunting  public.  Many  of 
the  part  icipants  were  interested  in  Learning  facts  about  deer  management. 
The  majority  of  the  hunters  were  well  satisfied  with  the  special  season. 
Eowever,  in  spite  of  this  there  lias  been  considerable  adverse  publicity 
in  California  from  individuals  and  groups  that  oppose  the  hunting  of 
female  deer. 

A  breakdown  of  the  resultant  antlerless  deer  bag  reveals  that 

688  animals  were  taken  in  Oregon 
1,319  animals  were  taken   in  California. 

The  special  hunts  resulted  in  the  removal  of  a  total  of  2.007  antlerless 
<lrrv,  or  about  two-thirds  of  the  planned  objective.  In  Oregon  53  out  of 
every  100  hunters  permitted  to  hunt  bagged  a  deer.  The  success  ratio  on 
the  winter  ran<re  in  California  was  slightly  over  94  oul  of  every  100 
hunters. 

Of  the  total  animals  checked,  the  age  classes  were  as  follows: 

Mature  does 68.9  percent 

Yearlings  13.6  percent 

Fawns 17.5  percent 

100.0  percent 

The  average  dressed  weights  of  mature  does  taken  in  California  was  90 
pounds,  of  yearlings  70  pounds,  and  of  fawns  41  pounds.  In  Oregon 
weights  were  somewhat  higher,  older  does  averaging  97  pounds,  young 
does  76  pounds,  female  fawns  42  pounds,  and  male  fawns  47  pounds. 
The  average  dressed  weights  of  Rocky  Mountain  mule  deer  taken  from 
an  area  of  good  range  in  northern  Utah  was  101  pounds  for  does  and 
55  pounds  for  fawns  (Stoddart  &  Rasmussen,  194.~>  i. 

PRODUCTIVITY   AND    HARVEST 

With  a  herd  of  approximately  28,000  deer  a  harvest  of  2,007  antler- 
less animals,  plus  an  estimated  regular  buck  kill  of  2,500  animals  (500 
in  California  and  2,000  in  Oregon)  represents  a  total  take  of  16.1  percent 
of  the  early  winter  population.  Tested  deer  management  practice  in 
other  western  states  indicates  it  is  possible  to  harvest  each  year  a  num- 
ber of  deer  equal  to  20  to  30  percent  of  the  winter  population  without 
lowering  the  level  of  production.  Obviously,  the  action  taken  on  the  ranges 
of  the  Devils  Garden  deer  herd  should  not  be  expected  to  result  in  an  over- 
all reduction  in  deer  numbers  nor  can  it  be  expected  to  bring  the  herd 
into  balance  with  the  forage  supply  on  the  winter  range. 


268 


(    \l.ll'u|;\  | ,\    PISH     Wli   GAME 


During  the  Las1  three  years  i  L947-48,  1948-49,  L949-50)  the  number 
of  fawns  in  the  herd  has  averaged  10.2  percenl  of  the  total  population, 
or  approximately  11,200  animals.  In  short,  the  herd  of  28,000  deer  may 

1 spected  to  produce  an  average  of  11,200  fawns  per  season,  or  a  ae1 

production  until  late  fall  of  10  percenl  it'  favorable  survival  conditions 
prevail. 

Allowing  a  generous  33  percenl  of  the  production  for  replacement 
of  all  normal  natural  losses,  a  surplus  of  7,500  animals  remains  each  sea- 
son available  for  harvesl  by  sportsmen.  Of  these,  sportsmen  ordinarily 
bag  aboul  2,500  bucks.  <  (bviously,  it'  the  remaining  surplus  of  5,000  ani- 
mals was  i"  survive  each  year,  the  deer  population  would  rapidly  grow 
to  greal  magnitude.  Bu1  these  surplus  animals  do  not  survive.  Because 
the  presenl  deer  population  already  out-balances  the  range  carrying 
capacity,  this  surplus  is  lost  each  year  from  winter  kill  or  other  causes. 


mSk^MMM 


Figure  107. 


Be<  ause  deer  numbers  exceed  the  carrying  capacity  of  the  winter  n 
surplus  deer  are  lost  each  year  from  winter  kill  or  other  causes 


No  systematic  study  has  been  made  to  date  of  the  number  of  deer 
that  die  each  year  on  the  winter  range.  The  apparent  low  survival  of 
buck  fawns  to  yearling  age,  indicates  a  high  mortality.  General  observa- 
tions indicate  there  has  been  a  considerable  loss  during  the  winters  of 
1948-49  and  1949-50.  The  Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee  plans  to  make 
such  a  study  during  the  winter  of  1950-51.  Perhaps  this  study  will  reveal 
the  magnitude  of  the  yearly  losses  of  deer  that  could  just  as  well  go  into 
the  hunter's  bag  if  regular  either-sex  hunting  was  permitted  on  this  deer 
range. 

In  the  meanwhile,  it  should  be  pointed  out  that  the  antlerless  deer 
hunts  held  in  1950  should  not  result  in  any  lasting  reduction  of  deer  on 
the  Devils  Garden  interstate  winter  deer  range.  It  will  be  necessary  to 
hold  other  antlerless  hunts  regularly  during  the  coming  years  to  manage 


THE   DEVILS   GARDEN  DEER   HERD 


269 


this  deer  herd  on  the  sound,  practical  basis  needed  to  maintain  the  forage 

resource  and  to  provide  sustained  production  of  deer  for  hunters  in  the 

future. 

RANGE    IMPROVEMENTS 

When  deer  become  too  numerous  for  the  supply  of  forage  on  their 
range,  there  are  two  ways  to  bring  supply  and  demand  into  balance.  One 
is  to  reduce  the  demand  by  harvesting  more  deer.  The  other  is  to  increase 
the  supply  by  artificial  range  improvement. 

For  the  Devils  Garden,  generally  it  may  be  said  that  the  area  is 
supporting  as  much  of  a  cover  of  vegetation  as  present  soil  and  moisture 
conditions  will  allow.  The  practical  objective  in  range  improvement  on 
this  area  is  not  to  increase  the  total  cover,  but  to  bring  about  changes  in 
the  kinds  and  condition  of  vegetation  now  presenl  on  the  range. 

The  California  Poresl  and  Range  Experimental  station  is  carrying 
on  experiments  in  bitterbrush  planting  on  the  deer  range.  So  far.  these 
trials  have  not  been  too  successful.  <  >ne  problem  in  planting  palatable 
forages  on  a  heavily  populate,!  deer  range  is  the  protection  of  the  young 
plants  until  they  become  established.  Since  these  young  plants  are  suc- 
enlent  and  palatable,  they  are  apt  to  be  severely  damaged  and  killed  ou1 
in  a  short  while  where  good  forage  is  in  shorl  supply.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  the  browsing  pressure  is  reduced  to  a  level  where  such  plantings  will 
survive,  natural  reproduction  may  reseed  more  widely  and  successfully 
than  can  artificial  planting  if  there  remains  sufficienl  native  seed  stock 
on  the  range. 

There  are  extensive  stands  of  sagebrush  on  the  Devils  Garden  range. 
Some  of  these  occur  on  good  soils  thai  will  respond  to  grass  reseeding. 
The  .Modoc  National   Foresl   is  clearing  sagebrush  from  such  sites  and 


wtot 

3 

a 

~.-.Ti»t*> 

-y^jfc.. 

^M  ' 

3 

Figure  10S. 


Mountain  mahogany   is  universally  high-lined  by  deer  browsing  on   the 
winter  range 


270  l   VLIPORN  LA    PISH    AND  GAME 

|)l;ini in<_r  good  perennial  grasses  as  rapidly  as  funds  and  manpower  will 
permit.  To  date,  1,680  acres  of  sagebrush  Land  have  been  converted  to 
grass  "ii  the  I  >evils  <  rarden  area. 

The  Forest  Service  is  also  developing  the  supply  of  water  on  the 
Devils  Garden  range,  principally  by  the  construction  of  dams  to  hold 
spring  run-off.  Water  usually  is  no1  a  problem  to  deer  during  the  winter 
period.  Bu1  the  scattering  of  waters  over  the  range  brings  about  better 
distribution  of  livestock  during  the  summer  months,  spreading  use  more 
evenly  over  the  area  and  decreasing  localized  range  damage. 

There  exists  a  considerable  acreage  of  mountain  mahogany  (Cerco- 
carpus  ledifolius)  on  the  Devils  Garden  range.  The  seasonal  growth  of 
1liis  plant  species  is  considered  an  excellenl  deer  food.  But  the  mahogany 
stand  consists  mostly  of  tall,  mature  shrubs,  or  trees.  These  are  univer- 
sally high-lined  from  overbrowsing  and  offer  little  available  forage  to 
deer  a1  the  present  time.  The  California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game  has 
been  experimenting  with  coppicing  of  mountain  mahogany  by  cutting 
the  tops  to  determine  if  sprout  growth  can  be  induced.  It  has  been  found 
that  the  cut-back  shrubs  will  produce  considerable  forage. 

To  coppice  sufficient  numbers  of  shrubs  to  have  a  material  effect  on 
the  food  supply  would  run  to  considerable  expense.  However,  further 
efforts  along  similar  lines  are  contemplated. 

The  construction  by  the  Modoc  National  Forest  of  a  division  fence 
along  the  north  boundary  of  the  deer  midwinter  concentration  area  to 
hold  back  the  spring  drift  of  cattle  already  has  had  a  beneficial  effect 
on  both  the  grass  and  browse  condition  of  this  part  of  the  winter  range. 
When  this  fence  is  completed,  it  is  planned  to  deter  livestock  use  of  the 
area  so  as  to  allow  native  grasses  to  mature  and  bring  about  faster  natural 
reseeding  of  perennials  on  the  badly  depleted  area. 

Tt  is  now  the  practice  to  reseed  to  palatable  grasses  all  wild-tire 
burns  that  occur  on  the  winter  ranee.  While  this  practice  will  hardly 
compensate  for  the  critical  loss  of  good  browses  that  results  from  fire, 
it  does  result  in  the  establishment  of  perennial  grass  stands  that  offer 
food  to  both  livestock  and  deer.  Tn  1950,  3,580  acres  of  wild-fire  burns 
were  reseeded  to  grasses  by  the  Forest  Service. 

CONCLUSION 

The  objective  in  deer  management  is  the  production  on  each  man- 
agement unit  of  the  maximum  number  of  harvestable  animals  that  may 
be  carried  on  a  sustained  yield  basis  without  serious  conflict  with  other 
legitimate  land  uses.  The  Interstate  Deev  Herd  Committee  seeks  to  real- 
ize this  objective  through  common  sense  management  of  the  deer  that 
winter  on  the  Devils  Garden  winter  deer  range.  Because  deer  numbers 
are  in  excess  of  the  natural  food  supply,  each  year  there  occurs  a  sur- 
plus of  both  male  and  female  deer  on  the  deer  range.  The  objective  in 
the  action  policies  recommended  by  the  committee  is  to  increase  the  har- 
vest of  deer  on  this  range  so  that  the  deer  herd  will  be  brought  into 
balance  with  the  productive  capacity  of  the  winter  range  and  so  that 
surplus  animals  will  be  used  rather  than  lost. 


THE  DEVILS   GARDEN   DEER   HERD  271 

REFERENCES 
Aldous,  C.  M. 

1945.  A  winter  study  of  mule  deer  in  Nevada.  Jouru.  Wildl.  Mgmt.,  vol.  9,  no.  2, 
p.  145-151. 

Aldous,  Shaler  E. 

1941.  Deer  management  suggestions  for  northern  white  cedar  types.  Journ.  Wildl. 
Mgmt.,  vol.  5,  no.  1,  p.  90-94. 

Allman,  Richard  T .,  and  T.  S.  Hamilton 

19411.     Nutritional  deficiencies  in  livestock.  F.  A.  O.  Agric.  Studies  no.  3.  Excerpt 
In  Journ.  Range  Mgmt.,  vol.  4,  no.  1,  p.  41. 
Canfield,  R.  H. 

r.).">l>.     Application  of  the  line  interception  method  in  sampling  range  vegetation. 
Journ.  Forestry,  vol.  39,  p.  388  394. 
<  'hat tin.  John  E. 

1948.  Breeding  season  and  productivity  in  the  interstate  deer  herd.  Calif.  Fish  and 
Game,  vol.  34,  no.  1.  p.  25-31. 

Cheatum,  E.  L.,  and  ('.  \V.  Severinghaus 

l!i.">0.     Variations  in  fertility  of  white-tailed  deer  related  to  range  conditions.  Trans. 
Fifteenth  X.  Am.  Wildl.  Conf.,  p.  170-189. 
Cronemiller,  F.  I'..  and  <!.  A.  Fischer 

1946.  Censusintf  a  deer  herd  hy  sampling  methods.  Trans.  Eleventh  X.  Am.  Wildl. 
Conf.,  p.  349  354. 

Dasmann,  William  P. 

1949.  Deer-livestock  forage  studies  on  the  interstate  winter  deer  range  in  Califor- 
nia. Journ.  Range  Mgmt.,  vol.  2,  no.  1,  p.  206  212. 

1951.     Some  .leer  range   survej    methods.  Calif.    Fish   and  Game,    vol.  .'>T,   no.  1, 
p.  43-52. 
Fischer,  George  A.,  John  ('.  1  »a\  is.  Floyd  I\  erson  and  F.  P.  Cronemiller 

1944.  The  winter  range  of  the  interstate  deer  herd.  Modoc  national  forest,  Califor- 
nia. U.  S.  Foresl  Service,  Region  5,  20  p.  (mimeographed) 

1945.  A  supplement  to  "The  winter  range  of  the  interstate  deer  herd."  Ibid,  7  p. 
i  mimeographed ) 

Hormaj .  August  L. 

1943a.  Bit  terbrusb  in  California.  Calif,   forest   and  Range  Exper.  Sta.,  Research 

Xote  34,  13  p.  (multilith) 
1943b.  A  method  of  estimating  grazing  use  of  bitterbrush.  Ibid,  Research  Xote  35, 
4  p. 

1949.  Getting   better   records   of   vegetation    changes   with    the  line   interception 
method.  Journ.  Range  Mgmt.,  vol.  2,  no.  2,  p.  ''>7  69. 

Interstate  Deer  Herd  Committee 

1946.  Progress  report  on  the  cooperative  study  of  the  interstate  'leer  herd  and  its 
range.  U.  S.  Forest  Service,  Region  5,  11  p.  (multilith  i 

1947.  Second  progress  report  on  the  cooperative  study  of  the  interstate  deer  herd 
and  its  range.  Calif.  Fish  and  Game,  vol.  33,  no.  4,  p.  287-314. 

1949a.  Interstate  winter  deer  range  management  plan.  Calif.  Fish  and  (lame.  vol. 

35,  no.  2,  p.  103-114. 
1949b.  Third  progress  report  of  the  cooperative  study  of  the  interstate  deer  herd  and 

its  range.  Ibid,  p.  115-134. 

1950.  Fourth  progress  report  of  the  cooperative  study  of  the  interstate  deer  herd 
and  its  range.  Calif.  Fish  and  Game.  vol.  36,  no.  1,  p.  27-52. 

Latham,  Roger  M. 

1950.     Pennsylvania's  deer  problem.  Pennsylvania  Game  News,  Special  Issue  no.  1, 
48  p. 
Leopold,  A.  Starker,  Thane  Riney,  Randal  McCain  and  Lloyd  Tevis 

1950.     The  Jawbone  deer  herd  :  part  1  of  final  report  on  Pittman-Robertson  Project 
California  28-R.  In  press. 
Lommasson,  T.,  and  Chandler  Jensen 

1942.  Determining  the  utilization  of  range  grasses  from  height-weight  tables.  U.  S. 
Forest  Service,  No.  Region,  9  p. 


I    \l.ll  <'i;\  i  \    ii-ii    AND   GAME 

M<<  lain,  Randal 

1948.     A  method  for  measuring  deer  range  use.  Trans.  Thirteenth  N.  Am.  Wildl. 
Conf.,  p.  i:;i   HI. 

Maloney,  A    B 

1945.     The  fur  brigade  to   the   Bonaventura,  John    Work's  California  expedition, 
1832-33.  Calif.  Historical  Soc,  San  Francisco,  Calif.,  L12  p. 

Morris,  J.  -T. 

L943      Botanical  analyses  of  stomach  contents  as  a   method  of  determining  forage 
consumption  of  range  sheep.  K<-o]ogy.  vol.  l'I.  no.  L'.  p.  L* 4  4  lt>1. 

Randle,  Allan  C. 

1938.  Deer   winter    range   studies,    L937-38:    Modoc   X:ition:il    Forest,   California 
Reg  on.  I  .  S.  Foresl  Service,  Region  5,  L7  p.  (mimeographed) 

1939.  Summary  reporl  on  the  winter  mule  deer  range  studies  made  during  the  win- 
ter of  1938-39.  U.  S.  Foresl  Service,  Region  5,  11  p.   (mimeographed) 

Rasmussen,  I».  [.,  and  Everett  R.  Doman 

1943.     Census  methods  and  their  application  in  the  managemenl  of  mule  deer.  Trans. 
Eighth  N.  Am.  Wildl.  Conf.,  p.  369-379. 
Severinghaus,  C.  W.,  II.  F.  Maguire,  R.  A.  Cookingham  and  J.  E.  Tanck. 

1950.     Variations  bj    age  class  in  tin-  antler  beam  diameters  of  white-tailed  deer 
related  to  range  conditions.  Trans.  Fifteenth  X.  Am.  Wildl.  Conf.,  p.  551-568. 
Smith.  Arthur  D. 

1950a.  Sagebrush  as  a   winter  feed  for  deer.  Journ.  Wildl.  Mgmt.,  vol.  14,  no.  3, 

p.  285-289. 
1950b.  Feeding  deer  on  browse  species  during  winter.  Journ.  Range  Mgmt..  vol.  •'!. 
no.  2,  p.  130-132. 
Stoddart,  L.  A.,  and  D.  I.  Rasmussen 

1945.     Deer  managemenl  and  range  livestock  production.  Utah  State  Agric.  College, 
Exper.  Sta.,  Circ.  1211,  17  p. 


NOTES  ON  KOKANEE  SPAWNING  IN  DONNER 
LAKE,  CALIFORNIA,  19491 

P,y  J.  TI.  Kimsiv 

Bureau  of  Fish  Conservation 

California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game 

INTRODUCTION 

Although  kokanee  red  salmon  (Oncorhynch  us  t<<  rka  kennerlyi)  were 
noted  spawning  along  the  shore  in  Donner  Lake,  Nevada  County,  in 
1946,  1947,  1948,  and  1949,  it  was  not  known  whether  or  not  the  eggs 
would  develop  to  hatching.  J.  C.  Fraser  observed  them  spawning  along 
the  shore  in  November,  1947  (Curtis  and  Fraser,  1948).  After  the  spawn- 
ing, however,  the  lake  was  drawn  down  very  heavily  in  January  and 
February  and  the  nests  were  Lef1  dry  ami  frozen.  This  same  condition  had 
been  noted  in  1946  by  A.  F.  Pollitt  of  tie-  Tahoe  Hatchery  of  the  Divi- 
sion of  Pish  and  Game.  From  these  observations  it  had  been  assumed 
that  natural  reproduction  of  kokanee  in  Donner  Lake  was  virtually 
i  in  possible. 

On  December  4.  1!»47.  5,190  eggs  at  230  per  ounce  were  taken  from 
kokanee  in  Donner  Lake  and  held  for  hatching  at  Tahoe  Hatchery.  One 
night  during  a  particularly  cold  period,  the  water  accidentally  went 
off  in  the  trough  which  carried  these  eggs  and  the  next  morning  they 
were  discovered  in  a  shrunken,  frozen  condil  ion.  [nstead  of  throwing  out 
the  supposedly  dead  eggs,  the  water  was  turned  back  into  the  trough  to 
see  if  they  would  recover.  The  whole  mass  of  frozen  eggs  rose  to  the  sur- 
t'aee  and  floated.  After  a  time  they  thawed,  swelled  out  to  normal  size, 
and  went  on  developing.  These  eggs  hatched  villi  only  a  normal  loss  and 
the  fry  were  later  planted.  The  above  observations  were  not  recorded  but 
were  obtained  from  the  different  hatchery  employees  who  handled  the 
eggs. 

Such  an  incident  made  it  appear  possible  that  if  the  eggs  in  the 
nests  at  Donner  Lake  were  frozen  or  partially  frozen  for  only  short 
periods,  they  might  continue  development  and  that  when  the  water  again 
covered  the  nests  they  would  hatch  out  and  the  resulting  fry  eventually 
would  enter  the  Donner  Lake  fishery. 

That  the  anadromous  form  of  the  red  salmon  (0.  nerka  nerka)  was 
a  successful  lake  shore  spawner  was  well  known,  but  little  information 
on  this  phase  of  the  kokanee 's  spawning  habits  was  available. 

OBSERVATIONS 

With  a  view  to  obtaining  definite  information  as  to  the  success  or 
failure  of  the  shore  spawning  of  kokanee  in  Donner  Lake,  extensive 
observations  were  carried  out  in  the  fall  of  1949. 


1  Submitted  for  publication  January,  1951. 

(  273  ) 


■2,  I  l    Mil"!.".  I  \    FISH    AND   <.  A  WE 

One  of  the  besl  areas  Eor  observing  the  spawning  of  kokanee  in 
Donner  Lake  is  located  off  the  end  of  Waggoner's  boat  pier  on  the  north 
shore.  This  area  is  only  a  fev  hundred  feel  from  the  highway  and  is 
easilj  accessible  even  through  the  heaviesl  of  snow.  The  shore  at  this 
poinl  slopes  gently  for  aboul  1""  feel  and  then  drops  off  abruptly  to 
depths  of  30  i"  50  feet.  When  the  lake  Level  is  normal,  the  edge  of  the 
shelf  is  tinder  aboul  six  to  eighl  feel  of  water.  The  water  is  one  to  three 
r  this  poinl  when  the  kokanee  begin  to  spawn  and  the  water 
surface  is  aboul  one  to  one  and  a  half  feel  below  it  at  the  point  of  maxi- 
mum drawdown.  The  section  where  the  observations  were  made  is  about 
100  yards  long  and  is  composed  of  a  mixture  of  sand,  "-ravel,  and  cobbles 
on  a  clay  substrate.  About  one  quarter  of  this  lies  in  a  spring  seepage 
area.  Since  the  clay  base  is  tipped  slightly  toward  the  lake,  the  gravel 
in  the  seepage  area  lias  a  slow  but  constant  flow  of  water  through  it. 

Tic  first  kokanee  were  seen  on  the  fourth  of  November,  194M.  when 
the  water  temperature  was  51  degrees  1-'.  at  the  surface.  These  consisted 
primarily  of  males  and  much  fighting  and  splashing  was  noted.  On  the 
fifth  of  November  a  gill  net  was  set  in  water  from  depths  of  six  to  fifty 
feet.  When  this  net  was  picked  up  on  November  6,  eight  male  and  one 
female  kokanee  were  taken.  All  were  in  water  shallower  than  20  feet 
except  the  female,  which  was  taken  at  50  feet.  The  males  had  free  flowing 
milt  and  the  female  emitted  eggs  on  compression.  The  average  size  of  all 
fish  taken  at  this  time  was  18^  inches  and  the  average  weight  was  about 
two  pounds.  The  coloration  and  body  conformation  were  identical  with 
those  described  for  the  anadromous  form  of  the  red  salmon  Kiuure  109). 
No  nest  building  was  observed  at  this  time. 

•Joseph  V.  Verret,  student  biologist,  made  an  extensive  reconnais- 
sance of  the  lake  shore  on  November  15,  21,  and  29.  lie  was  unable  to  find 
any  other  kokanee  spawning  in  the  lake.  However,  a  few  were  subse- 
quently reported  spawning  in  the  northwest  end. 


Figure   109.     Male  kokanee  in  spawning  condition,  November  5,  1949 


KOKANEE   SPAWNING    IX    DONNER    LAKE 


<>ii  November  15  and  2!».  Mr.  Verret  marked  nine  kokanee  nests. 
On  November  29  one  of  the  nests  was  partially  above  the  waterline 
and  200  eggs  were  removed.  These  eggs  appeared  to  be  in  the  "tender 
stage"  and  died  soon  after  handling. 

On  December  7  all  of  the  marked  nests  except  two  were  exposed. 
Sample  eggs  were  removed  and  were  found  to  be  developing  normally. 

At  this  time  tl ggs  were  buried  under  from  four  to  seven  inches 

of  gravel.  The  water  level  of  the  Lake  was  K)  inches  below  the  surface  of 
the  nests.  Even  though  the  surface  was  dry,  the  eggs  buried  only  four 
inches  were  kept  moisl  by  capillary  water.  The  temperature  of  the  sand 
in  whieh  the  eggs  were  embedded  was  39.5  degrees  F.  The  surface  of  the 
lake  was  47  degrees  F..  and  the  seepage  areas  lv  degrees  F.' 

On  December  12  the  top  three  inches  of  the  nests  were  frozen. 
Below  this  level  the  sand  was  not  fro/en  and  the  eggs  were  continuing 
development  at  •'!!•  degrees  F.  The  eggs  in  the  seepage  areas  were  still  in 
48  degrees  P.  water  and  several  appeared  to  be  in  the  firsl  stages  of 
"eyeing."  The  temperature  of  the  lake  was  45.5  degrees  F. 

Although  no  kokanee  had  been  reported  as  spawning  below  the  dam 
in  Donner  Creek,  this  area  was  investigated  on  December  12  and  20 
live  kokanee  i  1  1  males,  six  females  i  were  observed.  Three  dead  kokanee 
were  also  seen.  At  least  six  nests  were  noted  in  the  firsl  hundred  yards  of 
stream  below  the  dam.  and  there  were  probably  more  These  kokanee 
appeared  to  be  larger  than  those  in  the  lake  and  were  estimated  to  be 
from  18  to  20  inches  long,  with  a1  leasl  one  individual  about  24  inches  in 
length.  They  were  all  in  a  very  battered  condition  and  were  not  laying 
eggs,  although  some  Hexing  actions  and  fighting  was  noted  among  them. 
Most  of  them  appeared  to  be  so  weak  that  they  were  barely  able  to  main 
tain  their  position  in  the  current.  The  temperature  of  the  stream  was 
4i;  degrees  F. 


1  Unless  otherwise  stated  all  lake  temperatures  were  taken  at  the  surface  along 

i  he  shore. 


Figure  110. 


Male  kokanee   shortly   after   dying  at  the   end    of   the   spawning-   period. 
December  12,  1949. 


276 


I    \[  H  <>K\  I  \    FISH     IND  GAME 


<  Mi  December  23  the  air  temperature  \\;is  \1  decrees  I*'.,  the  lake 

12  degrees  F.,  and  tl ggs  in  the  exposed  nests  34  degrees  F.  The  top  five 

inches  of  nesl  were  frozen  and  there  was  from  one  to  three  inches  of 
snow  "ii  them.  The  eggs  below  this  Level  were  not  frozen  and  appeared  to 
!"■  still  developing.  Although  a1  leasl  1<)  kokanee  had  been  observed  on 
the  1-th  lit'  December,  none  were  noted  this  date.  There  were  no  dead 
fish  along  the  shore.  They  may  have  been  removed  In-  coyotes,  since  tracks 
of  these  animals  indicated  thai  they  had  been  prowling  along  the  beach. 
The  eggs  in  the  seepage  nests  were  not  frozen  and  were  continuing 
development  at  }.">  degrees  F. 

<mi  December  30  the  air  temperature  was  42  degrees  F.  and  the 

lake  temperature  was  12  degrees  K.  Tl ggs  in  the  exposed  nests  were 

frozen  so  hard  that  they  chinked  like  pebbles  when  dropped  into  a  col- 
lecting pan.  Tl ggs  in  the  seepage  areas  were  continuing  development 

at  45  degrees  F.  and  44  degrees  K  The  top  one-half  inch  of  the  seepage 
area  was  frozen,  bu1  the  eggs  were  not.  The  top  of  the  seepage  nests  was 
ahont  one  and  one-half  feet  above  the  lake's  surface,  but  the  eggs  were 
always  in  slowly  running  water. 

Five  kokanee  wen-  still  alive  in  Donner  Creek  on  December  30. 
The  temperature  of  the  stream  was  39  degrees  F.  One  dead  male  which 
measured  19  inches  in  length  and  weighed  2.8  pounds  was  picked  up. 
Before  the  tail  was  frayed  and  the  spawning  period  had  begun,  this 
fish  was  probably  20  inches  long  and  nearer  to  three  pounds  in  weight. 


%$&&£ 


Figure  111.     The  exposed  spawning  gravels  on  December  30,  1949,  when  all  nests  were 

exposed  and  frozen 


KOKANEE   SPAWNING    IX   DOXXER   LAKE 


277 


A  brief  observation  on  January  4  showed  the  eggs  in  the  seepage 
areas  to  be  in  the  eyed  stage  and  developing  at  44  degrees  F.  The  air 
temperature  was  33  degrees  F.  and  the  lake  40  degrees  F.  The  other 
nests  were  frozen  too  hard  to  break  through  with  a  shovel  in  the  limited 
time  available.  On  January  6  the  air  temperature  was  39  degrees  F., 
and  the  lake  was  40  degrees  F.  The  seepage  nests  were  44  degrees  F., 
and  the  eggs  were  developing  normally  At  this  time  a  section  2  feet  x 
3  feet  x  8  inches  was  excavated  over  a  known  ;i<">tin-  area.  There  were 
five  inches  of  frozen  sand  over  the  eggs.  Frozen  eggs  were  obtained 
singly  and  in  clusters  at  the  bottom  of  this  frozen  level  under  rocks  the 
size  <>!'  hens'  eggs.  The  eggs  were  all  greatly  shrunken  ami  very  hard. 
About  200  eggs  were  submerged  in  a  pan  in  the  lake.  When  they  had 
thawed,  they  regained  their  round  shape  but  turned  white.  A  total  of 
1,073  eggs  was  obtained  on  this  date.  A  careful  counl  had  been  kept  of 
all  eggs  previously  removed  from  the  same  area,  amounting  to  354,  giving 
a  total  of  1,427  eggs  in  six  square  feet.  It  was  estimated  that  the  eggs 
were  laid  in  a  bell  200  feet  x  (i  feet,  or  1,200  square  feet  of  nesting  area. 
A  conservative  estimate  based  on  this  area  would  put  the  total  number 
of  eggs  deposited  at  around  250,000.  Mr.  Jack  Waggoner  and  Mr.  Verret 
estimated  that  about  200  fish  weir  spawning,  with  a  sex  ratio  of  one 
female  to  four  males.  Assuming  1<>  of  these  to  he  females  and  each  tVmale 
to  deposit  approximately  2,500  eggs,  aboui  100,000  eggs  would  be 
deposited.  Taking  both  figures  into  consideration,  it  would  therefore 
be  reasonable  to  assume  that  somewhere  between  100,000  and  2.">n,000 
egoS  were  deposited.  The  actual  number  mosl  likely  lies  in  the  lower  range. 


Figure  112.     Nest  frozen  to   depth  of  seven  inches  on    December   30,   1949.   All   eggs 

here  were  killed. 


278  CALIPORN  I  \    FISH    A.ND   GA  \l  E 

On  January  20,  warm  rains  had  accelerated  the  thaw  and  the 
inflow  was  evidently  greater  than  the  outflow,  since  the  lake  bad  risen 
one  foot.  This  rise  bad  flooded  the  lowesl  nests  and  capillary  seepage 
again  was  keeping  the  higher  nests  moisl  and  thawed.  All  of  the  eggs 
uncovered  in  the  highest  nests  had  turned  white  ;i  ml  appeared  to  be  dead. 
The  lower  flooded  nests  still  had  live,  developing  eggs,  in  spite  of  the 
fad  thai  they  had  been  frozen  solid  for  unknown  periods  of  time.  It 
would  appear  thai  a1  leasl  the  lower  eggs  in  these  nests  were  kept  alive 
and  prevented  from  freezing  too  long  by  capillary  seepage  from  the 
warmer  lake  water.  The  eggs  in  these  nests  were  at  40  degrees  F.  on  this 
date,  as  was  the  hike  water. 

The  seepage  nests  were  ;it  44  degrees  F.  In  searching  for  eggs,  a 
number  of  empty  ones  were  round.  Very  careful  removal  of  the  over- 
burden of  sand  and  stones  resulted  in  finding  one  newly  emerged  kokanee 
and  several  others  which  were  vigorously  trying  to  emerge.  All  of  the 
eggs  i  approximately  30)  which  were  removed  were  very  active  and 
hatching  appeared  imminent.  Ninety  eggs  were  removed  from  the  frozen 
nests  near  the  shore  and  these,  with  the  30  seepage  eggs,  were  taken  to 
Tahoe  Hatchery  to  hatch  in  the  troughs. 

On  January  25  all  nests  were  again  flooded.  As  the  lake  came  up, 
the  excess  deposit  of  gravel  was  washed  off  by  wave  action  and  the 
deepesl  eggs  were  buried  three  inches.  An  estimated  90  percent  loss  in 
eggs  was  caused  by  the  freezing.  It  appeared  that  about  5  percent  of  the 
total  nests  were  in  the  seepage  area  and  another  5  percent  of  the  total 
were  in  the  lower  belt  of  frozen  nests,  which  continued  development  even 
though  frozen. 

On  February  l(i  the  air  temperature  was  42  degrees  F.  and  the 
water  under  six  to  eight  inches  of  ice  was  34  degrees  F.  A  number  of 
holes  were  cut  through  the  ice  to  observe  the  nesting  areas.  Two  small 
fish-like  objects  were  noted  over  the  lower  frozen  nests.  They  were  very 
active  and  would  swim  rapidly,  coast  to  a  stop  on  the  bottom,  and  then 
resume  swimming  rapidly.  At  this  time  it  was  snowing  and  a  wind  made 
it  difficult  to  make  observations.  One  kokanee  with  yoke  sac  was  obtained 
from  the  seepage  nesting  area.  This  individual  was  free  swimming  and 
very  active.  Tt  was  forced  out  of  hiding  by  violently  agitating  the  water 
with  a  shovel.  The  resulting  current  brought  several  out  of  the  rock 
crevices,  but  only  one  w'as  collected. 

The  eggs  placed  in  the  Tahoe  Hatchery  on  January  20  hatched 
and  the  fry  appeared  to  be  normal  in  every  respect.  The  average  tem- 
perature of  the  hatchery  water  was  43  degrees  F.  The  eggs  from  the 
seepage  nests  began  to  hatch  on  February  12  and  those  from  the  frozen 
nests  began  hatching  on  March  15. 

SUMMARY 

1.  Kokanee  in  Donner  Lake  began  spawning  activities  about  the 
fourth  of  November,  1949,  when  the  water  temperature  was  51  degrees  F. 
at  the  surface. 

2.  The  lake  was  drawn  down  to  the  extent  that  all  nests  were  uncov- 
ered by  December  23. 

3.  All  of  the  eggs  except  those  in  .the  seepage  areas  experienced  at 
least  occasional  freezing.  Eggs  submitted  to  prolonged  freezing  died. 


KOKANEE   SPAWNING   IN   DCNNER    LAKE  279 

4.  Eggs  in  the  seepage  area  developed  normally  at  temperatures 
ranging  from  44  degrees  F.  to  48  degrees  F.  They  began  hatching  in  the 
nests  about  January  20,  1950,  and  a  series  of  eggs  removed  to  Tahoe 
Hatehery  began  hatching  in  43  degrees  F.  water  on  February  12,  1950. 

5.  Eggs  removed  from  nests  which  had  experienced  little  freezing 
began  hatching  on  March  15,  when  removed  to  Tahoe  Hatchery. 

6.  Kokanee  fry  from  Donner  Lake  nests  which  were  hatched  in 
Tahoe  Hatchery  were  normal  in  cvci-v  respect,  in  comparison  with  the 
hatchery  kokanee. 

7.  It  is  believed  thai  the  successful  natural  reproduction  of  kokanee 
would  be  possible  on  ;i  large  scale  in  Donner  Lake  if  the  water  level  could 
be  stabilized  during  tlie  spawning  and  developmental  period. 

LITERATURE   CITED 
( 'urt  is  Brian,  and  J.  C.  Fraser 

L948.     Kokanee  in  California.  California  Fish  and  Game,  \<>l.  34,  no.  ."..  p.  111-114. 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  COTTID  FISH, 
CLINOCOTTUS  RECALVUS   (GREELEY)1 

By  Robert  W.  Mokkis 

Hopkins  Marine  Station  of  Stanford  University 

Pacific  Grove,  California 

INTRODUCTION 

Clinocottus  recalvus  was  one  of  several  species  used  in  a  study  of 
methods  of  incubating  the  eggs  and  rearing  the  larvae  of  marine  fishes 
in  the  laboratory.  While  the  techniques  involved  were  the  primary  field 
of  investigation,  some  notes  on  development  were  kept  during  the  course 
of  the  studies  in  order  to  add  to  the  knowledge  of  identities  of  eggs  and 
larvae  of  the  fishes  of  California.  A  reasonably  complete  account  has  so 
far  been  recorded  in  the  ease  of  only  this  one  species  and  this  is  here 
presented. 

The  invesigations  were  conducted  during  the  winter  and  spring  of 
1949-50.  Thus  far  the  rearing  experiments  have  been  entirely  of  an  ex- 
ploratory nature.  In  none  of  them  has  the  element  of  control  been  ade- 
quate. For  these  reasons  a  statement  of  methods  would  be  premature  at 
this  time. 

SOURCE   OF    MATERIAL 

Six  males  and  two  females  of  Clinocottus  recalvus  were  collected 
from  tide  pools  in  the  vicinity  of  Carme]  and  Pacific  Grove,  California, 
over  the  period  March  11  to  March  17.  1950.  They  were  placed  in  an 
aquarium  supplied  with  running  sea  water  and  containing  several  large 
stones.  On  March  18  the  aquarium  yielded  a  cluster  of  eggs  deposited  by 
the  larger  of  the  two  females,  which  was  95  mm.  in  total  length.  The 
smaller  female,  82  mm.  long,  deposited  a  duster  the  following  day.  These 
clusters  were  removed  at  the  time  of  their  respective  discoveries  and 
placed  in  separate  bowls  through  which  there  was  a  steady,  gentle  flow 
of  well-aerated  sea  water. 

EGG  CLUSTER 

Both  of  the  egg  masses  were  wedge  shaped  and  conformed  snugly 
with  the  contours  of  the  stones  and  aquarium  bottom,  between  which  they 
were  deposited.  The  cluster  laid  by  the  large  female  covered  an  area 
roughly  20  mm.  by  30  mm.  and  measured  about  10  mm.  at  its  thickest 
edge.  The  cluster  from  the  small  female  was  about  15  mm.  by  25  mm. 
and  also  about  10  mm.  thick  at  its  thickest  edge.  By  actual  count,  the 
cluster  deposited  by  the  small  female  contained  876  eggs.  The  eggs 
adhered  firmly  to  each  other  but  not  to  the  substrate.  In  the  small  cluster 
the  eggs  were  somewhat  more  firmly  united  than  in  the  larger  one,  appar- 
ently due  to  a  difference  in  the  amount  of  adhesive  material  among  them. 

1  Submitted  for  publication  January,  1951.  The  writer  wishes  to  express  his  grati- 
tude for  the  guidance  given  by  Dr.  Rolf  L.  Bolin. 

(281) 


282  <  ALIFORN  l.\    PISH    AND   GAME 

EGG 

The  eggs  of  both  females  were  of  the  same  pale,  translucent,  cream 
color  with  amber  oil  globules  of  a  more  transparent  nature.  This  color 
may  or  may  qoI   be  of  value  in  identification  since  Budd   (1940)   and 

ninaiin  1892  found  considerable  discrepancy  in  the  color  of  the 
3  of  another  species  of  this  same  genus.  Eggs  stripped  from  several 
specimens  of  Oligocottus  snyderi  Greeley  have  been  seen  which  were 
identical  in  color  with  the  ground  color  of  the  parenl  from  which  they 
came.  They  varied  from  pale  green  through  olive  to  a  deep  violet.  It  may 
be  that  color  will  be  of  little  value  in  the  identification  of  the  eggs  of  the 
species  described  in  this  paper. 

No  eggs  were  seen  to  he  markedly  distorted  from  the  spherical  shape. 
The  mean  diameter  of  10  eggs  from  the  larger  female  was  1.32  mm.,  and 
they  ranged  from  1.30  to  1.37  mm.  The  mean  diameter  of  20  eggs  from 
the  smaller  female  was  1.25  mm.,  and  these  ranged  from  1.21  to  1.35  mm. 

The  areas  of  contad  between  the  eggs  were  roughtly  circular,  rang- 
ing from  .153  to  .238  mm.  in  diameter  with  a  mean  diameter  of  .200  mm. 
in  the  case  of  the  larger  female.  .221  to  .306  mm.  with  a  mean  of  .267  mm. 
for  the  smaller  female. 

The  egg  capsules  were  tough  and  extremely  resistant  To  rupture  and 
their  thickness  was  found  to  be  quite  uniform  at  .032  mm.  Radial  canals 
are  very  evident  even  when  examined  under  a  wide-field  binocular  micro- 
scope. Each  of  these  opens  at  the  surface  in  a  conical  depression.  At  this 
comparatively  low  magnification  the  surface  of  the  capsule  appears 
smooth,  but  examination  at  the  magnification  of  440  diameters  shows  the 
texture  to  be  granular.  The  individual  elements  of  this  granulation  appear 
as  beadlike  nodes  arranged  in  rows  parallel  in  both  vertical  and  horizon- 
tal coordinates.  Superficially  at  least  they  bear  strong  resemblance  to  the 
rivet-shaped  processes  of  the  zona  radiata  in  Pygosteus  pungitius  as 
described  by  Eigenmann  (1890).  Appearance  of  the  capsule  when  ex- 
amined under  a  magnification  of  440  diameters  is  shown  in  Figure  113. 
The  term  capsule  used  in  the  above  description  implies  the  zona  radiata 
and  any  other  membranes  which  may  have  been  in  intimate  association 
with  it.  A  careful  inspection  revealed  nothing  answering  the  description 
of  a  micropyle ;  this  may  have  been  overlooked,  however. 

In  describing  the  eggs  of  cottid  fishes.  Budd  (1940)  and  Eigenmann 
(1892)  have  defined  the  number  of  oil  globules  present.  This  is  not  diag- 
nostic in  the  cues  presently  considered,  the  number  varying  greatly 
among  the  eggs  at  any  one  time  during  early  stages  of  incubation.  During 
these  initial  hours  of  embryonic  development  there  is.  in  general,  a  steady 
decrease  in  the  number  of  globules,  accompanied  by  a  concurrent  increase 
in  the  size  of  those  remaining.  Although  never  actually  witnessed,  it  is 
obvious  that  coalescence  of  the  droplets  takes  place.  During  the  last  five 
days  of  incubation  there  is  some  decrease  in  the  size  of  the  remaining  oil 
globule.  Regarding  the  absolute  quantity  of  oil  initially  present,  there 
appeared  to  be  some  difference  among  the  eggs. 

The  yolk,  which  imparts  the  creamy  translucent  color  to  the  egg, 
is  somewhat  variable  in  quantity.  This  conclusion  is  made  on  the  basis 
of  the  apparent  difference  in  the  size  of  the  perivitelline  space  in  the 
different  eggs.  The  "opaque,  grayislvbrown  mass  of  flocculent  material" 
seen  in  the  yolk  of  the  eggs  of  Orthonopias  triads  Starks  and  Mann  by 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OF  CLINOCOTTUS  BECALVUS         283 

Bolin  i  1941 )  is  present  in  the  eggs  described  in  this  paper.  This  mass 
is  usually  in  intimate  association  with  the  embryo  or  one  of  the  oil 
globules  but  this  is  not  always  the  case.  The  yolk  appears  to  become 
progressively  more  dense  during  development,  due,  apparently,  to  a 
constriction  of  the  layer  of  protoplasm  over  it  during  the  earlier  stages 
of  development  and  in  the  later  stages  to  the  confinement  imposed  by 
tin-  extra-embryonic  ectoderm.  After  about  70  hours  the  yolk  has  become 
so  dense  that  the  oil  globules  no  longer  rise  freely  through  it  hut  are 
held  firmly  in  one  position.  That  this  density  is  not  inherent  to  the  yolk 
is  indicated  by  the  free  movemenl  of  the  oil  globule  after  the  larva 
has  hatched.   Protoplasm    was  not    identified   in   the  yolk. 

EMBRYONIC    DEVELOPMENT 

The   smaller   egg   cluster    was   broken    into   small    pieces   to    facilitate 

counting  and  this  harsh  treatment  resulted  in  the  early  demise  of  over 
half  of  the  eggs  it  contained.  Other  than  this  initial  heavy  mortality 
in  the  one  hatch,  development  proceeded  at  a  comparable  rate  in  both 
clusters  of  eggs  and  further  mortality  was  about  equal.  Water  tempera- 
tures were  taken  daily  during  the  course  of  incubation,  and  ranged 
from  13  degrees  to  15  degrees  C.  The  descriptions  ami  the  figures  are 
based  on  eggs  which  were  picked  from  the  cluster  at  each  examination. 
It  was  learned  from  early  experience  that  the  rate  of  development  was 
greatly  affected  by  the  heal  during  the  period  of  examination  under 
the  microscope.  After  eggs  were  once  examined,  they  were  placed  iii  a 
separate  container  and  not  again  used  in  recording  the  data  <>u  devel- 
opment. 

The  development  can  best  he  followed  by  reference  to  the  accom- 
panying figures. 

Figure  111  represents  an  egg  at  the  earliest  stage  observed.  This 
stage  is  considered  "zero*-  hours  of  development  for  the  purpose  of 
assigning  the  times  to  the  other  stages  although  the  exact  age  of  the 
egg  represented  here  is  not  known,  h  is  evidently  very  young  and  judg- 
ing from  the  report  of  Bolin  (1941)  on  Orthonopias  triads,  develop- 
ment had  probably  been  initialed  within  the  previous  hour.  At  this 
stage  the  yolk  is  drawing  away  from  the  capsule  to  form  the  perivitel- 
line  space!  This  space  has  a  greatesl  width  of  about  .20  to  .25  mm  and 
is  completely  formed  in  the  firsl  hour  of  recorded  development.  The 
behavior  of  the  yolk  indicates  that  the  space  is  filled  with  a  liquid  of 
a  slightly  lower  specific  gravity  than  that  of  the  yolk.  At  this  early 
stage  several  large  oil  globules  are  present  and  rise  freely  through  the 
yolk,  while  innumerable  very  small  droplets  lie  at  the  periphery,  their 
ratio  of  surface  to  volume  being  so  great  as  to  impede  their  rise. 

During  the  period  in  which  the  perivitelline  space  is  forming,  the 
protoplasm  over  the  surface  of  the  yolk  moves  to  form  an  elongate  mass 
lying  along  a  meridian.  This  movement  is  evident  only  by  the  accumu- 
lation of  the  protoplasm,  no  streaming  of  the  latter  being  visible.  The 
protoplasm  moves  without  regard  to  gravity,  indicating  that  it  is  of 
about  the  same  density  as  the  yolk.  The  accumulation  of  protoplasm 
in  this  meridian  does  not  at  first  bulge  into  the  perivitelline  space  but. 
rather,  depresses  the  yolk.  However,  a  short  time  later  the  flow  con- 
tinues to  one  end  of  the  elongate  mass  where  the  blastodisc  commences 
to  form.  This  stage  is  shown  in  Figure  115,  representing  an  egg  after 


I'M 


CALIFORNIA    ll-ll    AND   GAME 


>  j  j  >  i  >  j  j  >' 


,  j  j: 


■  j  J  j  J  j 


j  j 


•  J  J 


P. 
J  j. 


•  -I  -J  J  J  J  -i<*-J  j  J  J  .>_>  -k»-  J  J  v  J  J  J 
IjjjJjjjjJpljJJjsj    *C  J  J  J  J  J  J 

•  j  j  si  j  j  j  j  >j  j  •  j  >  >  jj  )  )  >  iM   j 

'  -gi»->  J  J  J  Js  J  ■>  ■>    'i->JJ->jJJJ   J  J  J 
■  >T  J  j  j    ■    -  jj//    '  J->~>  ./    '  J^tj  J   I   >   J   > 
bjjj  )  ;jjjj  J  J  j  j  j  ■>  J  J  i  J  j  jj  ^>~>  i 

j  j  j  J*  j. 

j  j  jjj.ii^/jj  jjjjjj^jj  ^jj-jjjjjj 

j  j  J  j  ;jj'jJjj  jj  J  >  jj  j>^  J  ->  J  ^vjj-J  • 
JJiJjJJ;JJ)ljijJ.  ->'>_)  ->  >  J  JJJjJJ 
J  J  J  J  ->  j  . 


->Jv  j  j ->  j  j  -i-J  >  '*>  Jf  >i  J  Jff  j  j  jJ/jj; 

\i   >  i    i  1  JVj  J  i  >  JJ>  J  J  J    )   ;  )  J  j  >  Jdft  , 


V- 


o  >jjj  j_>>  *; 


Figure    113.    Kpg  capsule  much  enlarged. 

Entire  field  shown  represents  an  area  .05 

mm.  in  diameter. 


Figure   114.     Egg  at  zero  hours  of  devel- 
opment. Perivitelline  space  forming.  Total 
diameter  of  egg  1.30  mm. 


Figure   115.     Egg  at  two  hours  of  devel- 
opment. Protoplasm  has  converged   in  a 
general  meridian  and  is  moving  to  form 
the  blastodisc. 


Figure  116. 


Four     hours. 
Mastodisc. 


Well-formed 


Figure  117.     Five  hours.  Two-cell  stage. 


Figure   118.      Seven  and  one-half  hours. 
Four-cell  stage. 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OF  CLINOCOTTUS  RECALVUS  2.85 

two  hours  of  incubation.  Here  is  seen  the  streak  of  protoplasm  lying 
to  the  left  and  the  developing  blastodisc  at  its  upper  end.  That  the 
protoplasm  remaining  over  the  yolk  is  confining  it  closely  is  suggested 
by  the  furrow  in  the  yolk  which  is  produced  by  the  early  meridional 
accumulation  of  protoplasm. 

After  four  hours  the  egg  appears  as  shown  in  Figure  116.  Here  is 
seen  a  well-formed  blastodisc  with  no  traces  of  the  surrounding  proto- 
plasm being  visible. 

Figure  117  shows  an  egg  after  five  hours  of  incubation.  At  this 
time  the  first  cleavage  has  taken  place,  and  the  firsl  two  blastomeres 
are  to  be  seen.  The  firsl  plane  of  cleavage  is,  obviously,  meridional. 

After  seven  and  one-half  hours,  the  egg  appears  as  m  Figure  118. 
By  this  time  the  second  cleavage  has  been  completed  at  righl  angles  to 
the   first. 

Figure  119  depicts  the  egg  after  nine  and  one- ha  If  hours,  at  which 

time  eighl   cells  are   fully   for I.  Six  and   seven  cell  stages  are  also 

commonly  seen.  In  some  eggs  held  under  the  microscope  for  prolonged 
observation,  the  third  cleavage  was  seen  to  occur.  It  paralleled  one  of 
the  first  two  cleavage  planes,  but  differences  in  the  rates  of  cell  division 
caused  the  two  developing  furrows  to  be  badly  distorted.  The  firsl  two 
planes  were  also  displaced  in  this  process,  and  a  considerable  loss  of 
symmetry  occurred.  Whether  the  furrows  of  the  third  plane  parallel 
the  firsl  or  second  cleavage  is  not  known  since  four  equally  defined  cells 
existed  at  the  time  this  observation  was  begun. 

At  11  hours  an  egg  was  observed  with  16  well-defined  cells.  It  is 
shown  in  Figure  120.  At  this  time  the  blastomeres  of  the  eggs  observed 
were  arranged  in  configurations  of  highly  divergenl  nature.  Twelve-. 
13-,  14-,  and  15-cell  stages  were  encountered,  ('ells  shifting  over  one 
another  often  obscured  some  of  the  others  present. 

At  about  14  hours,  the  blastoderm  recovered  a  high  degree  of  sym- 
metry. At  tins  time,  the  firsl  well-formed  blastodermal  cap  could  be 
seen.  It  is  shown  in  Figure  121.  It  was.  at  first,  lenticular  in  shape  and 
later  rose  from  the  yolk  becoming  considerably  more  thickened.  The 
number  of  cells  contained  in  the  cap  could  not  be  determined. 

The  egg  shown  in  Figure  122  shows  the  condition  at  24  hours  of 
development  when  the  late  blastodermal  cap  consisted  of  cells  greatlj 
reduced  in  size.  At  this  time,  the  cap  was  almost  hemispherical  in  shape 
except  that  its  periphery  assumed  a  sharp  gradient  as  it  conformed  to 
the  contour  of  the  yolk. 

In  Figure  123  appears  a  lateral  view  of  an  embryo  at  57  hours. 
The  posterior  pole  lies  to  the  right  where  the  embryo  has  become  somewhat 
flattened.  Encroachment  upon  the  segmentation  cavity  by  involution,  par- 
ticularly at  the  posterior  end.  causes  the  cavity  to  be  clearly  visible  only 
at  the  left,  forward  of  the  anterior  end  of  the  embryo.  The  germ  ring  is 
prominent  around  the  margin  of  the  segmentation  cavity.  This  ring  is 
wide  at  the  posterior  pole  of  the  disc,  narrowing  laterally  and  anteriorly. 
Manifestations  of  the  phenomena  associated  with  the  formation  of  the 
periblast,  as  described  by  "Wilson  (1891),  were  not  definitely  observed 
although  at  the  perimeter  of  the  ring  an  area  was  marked  off  by  a 
constriction  forming  a  structure  which  somewhat  resembled  the  descrip- 
tion of  a  periblastic  wall.  This  structure  was  obscured  by  the  germ  ring- 
after  a  few  more  hours  of  development. 


286 


<  A  1. 1  nil;  \  I A    PISH    AND  OAME 


Figi  re   119.      Nine    and    one-half    hours.  Figure   120.      Eleven    hours.    Sixteen-cell 

Eight-cell  stage.  stage. 


Figure  121.     Fourteen  hours.  Early  bias-  Figure   122.     Twenty-four     hours.     Late 

todermal  cap.  blastodermal  cap. 


Figure  123.     Fifty-seven      hours.       Seg- 
mentation cavity  and  germ  ring. 


Figure  124.      Seventy-three  hours.  Germ 
ring  advancing  past  the  equatorial   posi- 
tion. 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OF  CLINOCOTTUS  RECALVUS         287 

Figure  124  is  of  the  right  lateral  aspect  of  the  embryo  after  73  hours 
of  incubation.  Differential  growth  of  the  germ  ring  is  now  quite  evident. 
In  this  figure  it  has  grown  anteriorly,  passing  the  equatorial  position  and 
can  be  seen  to  produce  a  slight  constriction  in  the  surface  of  the  yolk. 
The  restriction  imposed  upon  the  yolk  by  its  increasing  investment  of 
extra-embryonic  ectoderm  apparently  produces  the  increase  in  density 
earlier  described.  With  this  confinement  the  oil  globules  are  rendered 
practically  immobile. 

At  88  hours  the  blastopore  has  dosed  and  Kupffer's  vesicle  has 
become  evident.  There  are  profound  changes  in  the  anterior  end  of  the 
embryo  and  the  eyes  have  become  visible. 

A  lateral  aspect  of  the  embryo  a  fter  96  hours  appears  in  Figure  125. 
A.1  this  time  the  eye  with  its  lens  is  clearly  visible,  and  the  posterior 
margin  of  the  midbrain  is  marked  by  a  noticeable  constriction.  Kupffer's 
vesicle  is  now  and  for  ;i  few  hours  following,  at  its  peak  of  development. 
The  remnant  of  the  segmentation  cavity  persists  ;it  this  stage  as  ;i  clear 
area  between  the  yolk  ami  the  extra-embryonic  ectoderm,  spreading 
forward  and  laterally  from  the  anterior  end  of  tl mbryo. 

Parts  of  the  central  nervous  system  are  more  highly  developed  ami 
segmentation  of  the  body  is  clearly  seen  by  the  fifth  day  of  incubation. 
Figure  126  represents  an  embryo  a1  this  stage. 

The  embryo  on  the  sixth  day  is  shown  in  Figure  127.  The  hearl  can 
he  seen  nn  the  ventral  surface  of  tin-  body  slightly  posterior  to  the  eyes 
ami  its  pulsation  is  now  regular  and  well  sustained.  The  otic  capsules  arc 
present.  Kupffer's  vesicle  lias  almost  lost  its  identity,  and  tic  tail  is  com 
mencing  to  grow  five  from  the  yolk.  Sporadic  twitching  movements  can 
now  be  discerned. 

Figure  128  represents  an  embryo  of  nine  days.  By  this  time  the 
otoliths  have  become  clearly  visible  ami  the  tail,  now  growing  \'vct\  has 
lengthened  extensively  ami  is  twisted  to  lie  flat  on  the  yolk;  it  is  quite 
active  ami  moves  from  one  side  to  the  other.  The  last  of  the  see-mentation 
cavity  can  si  ill  be  seen  hut  ii  is  obscured  during  the  next  day  or  two  by 
the  increasing  growth  of  the  tail.  The  eyes  have  now  acquired  some 
pigment  and  darken  progressively  from  this  time  on.  The  yolk  has  become 
so  (lark  'it  this  stage  that  it  is  nearly  opaque. 

A  dorso-lateral  view  of  tin1  anterior  regions  of  the  embryo  at  1">  days 
of  incubation  appears  in  Figure  129.  Melanin,  which  first  made  its 
appearance  over  the  body  cavity  on  the  eleventh  day.  has  come  to  lie  in 
large,  well-defined,  stellate  chromatophores.  Several  dendritic  melano- 
phores  of  extremely  delicate  appearance  now  lie  over  the  nape  and  also 
on  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  head  just  back  of  the  eyes.  A  row  of  small 
melanophores  lies  along  the  ventral  surface  of  the  tail.  The  eyes  have 
acquired  sufficient  pigment  to  be  seen  without  magnification.  The  vitel- 
line veins  are  quite  prominent.  The  entire  animal,  but  particularly  the 
head,  has  undergone  much  growth.  The  granular  patches  on  the  surface 
of  the  head,  seen  by  Eigenmann  (1892)  and  other  more  recent  authors, 
are  now  present.  It  was  suggested  by  Bolin  (1941)  that  these  might 
function  as  rasping  points  to  assist  the  embryo  in  extricating  itself  from 
the  heavy  capsule  at  hatching.  In  the  case  of  the  embryos  considered 
here,  this  possibility  seems  unlikely.  The  granulations  are  minute  con- 
vexities of  low  elevation  which  grade  into  the  dorso-anterior  surface  of 
the  head  with  a  very  gentle  slope.  They  were  first  seen  at  15  days  of 


288 


CALIPORN  l  \    PISH     Wli  QAM] 


Figure  125.      Ninety-six  hours.   Eye  and 
Kupffer's  vesicle. 


Figure  126.     Five  days 


Figure   127.      Six  days 


Figure  128.     Nine  days 


Figure   129.     Fifteen  days 


Figure  130.     Nineteen  days 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OE  CLINOCOTTUS  RECALVUS  289 

incubation.  Their  location  and  approximate  size  can  be  seen  in  Figure  129. 
Later  in  this  description  they  will  again  be  discussed. 

The  delicate  membranes  of  the  pectoral  fins  were  first  seen  on  the 
sixteenth  day.  At  this  time  they  were  visible  only  when  the  embryo  was 
in  such  a  position  that  they  could  be  viewed  against  the  clear  perivi- 
telline  space. 

HATCHING 

An  outline  drawing  depicting  the  proportionally  large  size  of  the 
head  on  the  19th  day  when  the  embroyos  began  hatching  is  shown  in 
Figure  130.  Good  fortune  \v;is  experienced  in  having  an  egg  in  advan- 
tageous position  under  the  microscope  and  in  perfect  focus  at  the  verj 
moment  of  the  initial  rupture  of  its  capsule.  The  head  emerges  explo- 
sively,  bu1  the  remainder  of  lie1  body  may  stay  in  the  capsule  for  some 
time.  When  the  head  firsl  comes  ou1  i1  is  extremely  flattened.  The  incipi- 
ent lower  jaw  is  crushed  back  and  upward  againsl  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 
The  dorsal  surface  of  the  eyes  is  almost  level  with  the  extreme  top  of  the 
head.  This  great  flattening  was  nut  noted  at  the  time  of  the  preparation 
of  Figure  L29;  however,  a  retrospective  examination  of  thai  figure  indi- 
cates such  a  <• lition  even  a1  thai  earlj  date,  Immediately  upon  emerg 

ing  from  the  capsule  the  head  begins  to  round  ou1  and  enlarge.  Con- 

c itant  with  this  change  in  contour  the  granular  patches  on  its  surface 

largely  disappear.  After  three  or  Hour  hours  only  traces  of  crescentic  and 
circular  lines  remain  to  mark  their  former  position.  It  appears  probable 
that  these  patches  are  merely  distortions  in  the  surface  of  the  head  which, 
though  destined  to  be  rounded,  is  greatly  flattened  by  the  extreme  pres- 
sure which  it  suffers  during  its  late  stages  of  confinement.  Measurement 
of  the  wall  of  the  empty  capsule  indicates  no  decrease  in  its  thickness  dur- 
ing incubation,  nor  were  any  scores  of  erosion  observed  on  its  inner  sur- 
face. It  must  be  added,  bowever,  that  it  is  difficult  to  avoid  search  for  a 
structure,  perhaps  analogous  to  the  egg-tooth  of  birds,  which  could 
facilitate  the  escape  of  the  delicate  larva  from  this  extremely  resistant 
capsule. 

Hatching  began  on  April  7  in  the  large  cluster  and  during  the 
following  night  in  the  small  one.  Shortly  after  the  beginning  of  hatching 
the  eggs  were  removed  from  running  water  and  placed  in  a  container  of 
sea  water,  equipped  with  a  mechanical  agitator.  Approximately  80  per- 
cent of  the  eggs  hatched  on  April  7  and  8.  Thus,  with  respect  to  both 
clusters,  hatching  occurred  primarily  on  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth 
days  of  incubation.  Among  those  eggs  remaining,  some  hatching  con- 
tinued for  the  next  eight  days,  at  the  end  of  which  time  only  a  few  living 
individuals  remained.  These  were  discarded.  The  larvae  hatching  after 
April  8  were  much  smaller  than  those  which  hatched  the  first  two  days. 
These  late-hatched  larvae  were  weak  and  inviable.  Conspicuous  was  the 
difference  in  the  size  of  the  eye  of  the  late  individuals,  the  diameter  of 
this  organ  being  reduced  by  as  much  as  one-third  that  of  the  eye  in  the 
healthy,  early-hatched  larvae.  The  late-hatched  members  are  not  con- 
sidered in  this  description  since  they  failed  to  develop. 


29(1  I    \l.in  (RNIA    PISH    AND   GA  M  E 

LARVAL    DEVELOPMENT 

During  the  firsl  eighl  weeks  of  Larval  development,  water  tempera- 
tures were  taken  once  or  twice  daily.  These  temperatures  ranged  from 
13.5  degrees  to  1 7..")  degrees  < '.  No  greater  change  than  1 .5  degrees  ( '.  was 
uoted  in  any  single  period  of  24  hours.  A  ft  it  two  months,  water  tempera- 
tures were  no  longer  taken  regularly. 

To  record  their  progress,  larvae  were  examined  briefly  each  day  or 
two  during  their  firsl  four  weeks.  What  appeared  to  be  typical  specimens 
were  examined  thoroughly  and  a  drawing  was  prepared  whenever 
developmenl  bad  proceeded  to  the  point  where  such  a  figure  would  be 
useful.  The  course  of  developmenl  can  best  be  followed  by  reference  to 
these.  In  preparation  of  the  drawings,  well-defined  outlines  are  shown 
by  solid  lines.  Vague  margins  or  the  edges  of  hyaline  areas  are  shown  in 
stippled  lines.  I  [p  to  and  including  the  figure  of  the  larva  at  seven  weeks 
of  age  (Figure  137),  individual  melanophores  have  been  shown  as 
accurately  as  possible.  For  the  condition  of  the  other  pigments  up  to  this 
time,  the  text  must  suffice.  Stippled  areas  in  these  figures  represent  the 
relative  opacity  of  those  regions.  In  Figure  139  the  chromatophores  have 
become  so  numerous  and  relatively  so  small  that,  for  the  most  part,  their 
positions  have  been  shown  as  stippled  areas.  It  appears  likely  that  with 
development  there  is  a  virtual  as  well  as  relative  diminution  in  size  of 
the  melanophores,  but  their  expansion  and  contraction  makes  this  diffi- 
cult to  ascertain.  Live  specimens  are  shown  in  Figures  131,  132,  133,  134, 
135  and  137.  The  remaining  figures  are  of  animals  freshly  killed. 

NEWLY    HATCHED    LARVA 

Figures  131  and  132  represenl  the  newly  hatched  larva,  with  mean 
length  of  4.65  mm.  These  larvae  were  at  least  two  hours  old,  their  heads 
having  rounded  out.  and  lower-  jaws  having  become  functional.  Although 
the  lower  jaw  opens  and  closes,  no  stream  of  water  can  be  seen  passing 
through  the  mouth.  The  granular  patches  of  the  surface  of  the  head 
remain  only  as  faint  delicate  lines  at  this  time.  They  are  crudely  depicted 
in  the  figures.  Some  of  the  parts  of  tie'  central  nervous  system  are  well 
defined  in  the  anterior  regions,  bur  back  of  the  head  the  cord  is  not  marked 


Figure  131.     Newly  hatched  larva    Total  length  4.6  mm. 


Figure  132.     Newly  hatched  larva,  dorsal  view.  Total  length  4.7  mm. 


IAKLV    DEVELOPMENT   OF   CLINOCOTTUS    RECALVUS  29] 

off  from  the  developing  muscular  tissue.  The  eyes  are  prominent  and 
highly  Functional,  and  the  choroid  fissure  is  still  evident,  though  reduced. 
The  otic  capsules  and  otoliths  can  be  seen  quite  plainly.  Neither  olfactory 
capsules  nor  nasal  pits  are  evident.  Midway  along  the  body,  segmenta- 
tion is  quite  obvious  but  grows  increasingly  less  conspicuous  both  ante- 
riorly and  posteriorly.  The  finfolds  are  large  and  continuous,  the  ventral 
being  slightly  deeper  than  the  dorsal  one.  The  gut  is  small  and  lias  one 
loop  embedded  in  the  yolk.  The  liver  is  prominent  and  in  sum,,  specimens 
a  bright  green  gall  bladder  is  to  be  seen.  The  oil  globule  moves  freely  in 
the  anterior  part  of  the  yolk  sac.  During  the  preparation  of  the  drawing, 
the  larva  usually  come  to  resl  in  an  inverted  position,  thus  the  oil  globule 
in  the  figure  is  in  the  ventral  pari  of  the  yolk.  Normally,  with  the  body 
upright,  the  oil  globule  comes  to  resl  againsl  the  antero-ventral  surface 
of  the  liver.  Two  to  12  diffuse,  dendritic  melanophores  appear  on  the  top 
of  the  head  in  the  interorbital  space,  the  pattern  extending  back  to  inert 
that  over  the  nape  where  there  are  13  to  in  pigmenl  cells  of  the  same 

general  appearance.  When  they  an-  all  in  ; xpanded  condition,  the 

melanophores  over  the  nape  are  somewhat  darker  than  those  on  the  head 
There  are  three  to  seven  pah'  melanophores  within  each  otic  capsule. 
Three  to  five  dendritic  melanophores  are  situated  on  each  side  of  the  yolk 
sac  antero-laterally,  ami  14  to  ~2\  smaller  ones  extend  along  the  ventral 
margin  of  the  bodj  beginning  somewhere  between  the  fifth  ami  eleventh 

segmenl  back  from  the  vertical  of  the  amis  The  first  »r  two  of  these 

are  usually  separated  from  the  remainder  of  this  s.-ries  by  i or  two 

unpigmented  segments,  and  the  last  one  to  five  extend  diagonally  down 
into  the  ventral  finfold.  Over  the  body  cavity  lies  an  elliptical  pattern 
of  large  stellate  melanophores.  Prom  a  lateral  view,  this  pattern  narrows 
into  a  hand  anteriorly  that  is  lost  within  the  head  and  posteriorly  into 
a  hand  that  curves  downward   following  the  descending  gut.   When  seen 

dorsally  as  in  Figure  132,  aboul  35  to  50  of  these  large  melanophores  can 

be  counted  on  either  side,  arranged  in  five  to  six  reasonably  well-defined 
rows.  They  tend  to  have  clear  centers  ami  radial  branches  arising  from 
a  central  ring  of  melanin.  Even  when  fully  expanded  they  are  dark  and 

well  defined  and  do  not  lose  their  individual  identities.  On  the  surface 
of  the  descending  gut,  approximately  Hi  melanophores  can  be  counted. 
and  one  is  located  on  the  lip  at  each  side  of  the  anus.  The  above-mentioned 

elliptical  pattern  in  which  these  melanophores  lie  is  formed  by  a  matrix 
of  \anthin.  itself  behaving  very  much  like  a  large  chromatophore.  <'om 
ditions  causing  dilation  and  contraction  of  the  melanophores,  such  as 
exposure  to  chemicals  and  sudden  temperature  change,  cause  the  margin 
of  the  ellipse  of  xantliin  to  move  in  an  undulating  fashion.  Tn  death  it  i- 
seen  to  be  contracted,  shrinking  the  entire  pattern  toward  the  midline. 
A  small  amount  of  diffuse  xantliin  is  found  on  the  nape  and  the  top  of 
the  head.  This  pigment  is  not  -eon  as  well-defined  chroniatophores  in 
these  areas. 

TEN-DAY    LARVA 

During  the  first  10  days  after  hatching  the  length  increases  by  about 
one-half  millimeter  in  most  of  the  specimens  and  the  yolk  sae  loses  its 
broad  lateral  convexities,  the  yolk  having  been  exhausted  i  Figure  133). 
An  oil  globule  does  not  persist  beyond  five  days  after  hatching.  The  intes- 
tinal loo])  has  grown  much  larger,  and  food  organisms  can  now  be  seen 


(   A  1. 1  I 'OK  \  I  A    PISH    AND    QAM1 


5««y«to&  .  Ill  i  3  £  <  *  i  J  t  I  *i»       -       .. 

; 

v         •      •-  .i.  ...-—— 


■ 

l'"n;i  1:1:    1  :::*..      Tcrwlay  larva.  Total  length  5.0  mm. 

within  it.  [ncipienl  elements  of  the  operculum  have  spread  down  and 
bacfe  from  the  eye,  almosl  obscuring  the  Lower  jaw  when  the  latter  is 
closed.  No  trace  remains  of  the  choroid  fissure.  The  posterior  reaches  of 
the  body  have  become  deeper,  and  the  dorsal  nerve  cord  is  now  clearly 
defined  from  the  developing  muscle  segments.  The  posterior  end  of  the 
tail  curves  up  slightly  al  this  time.  A  change  has  taken  place  in  the 
ventral  unfold  .just  hack  of  the  anus  so  that  it  now  bears  a  slight  indenta- 
tion  at  thai  point.  The  contour  of  the  head  has  changed  somewhat  as  can 
be  seen  in  the  figure. 

The  melanophores  have  become  heavier  over  the  body  cavity  and 
the  nape  and  increased  in  number  on  the  top  of  the  head  while  xanthin 
has  become  more  intense  in  all  of  these  areas.  In  addition,  three  or  four 
melanophores  have  appeared  on  the  wall  of  the  forebrain  just  anterior 
to  the  eyes.  Vitelline  circulatory  elements  now  form  a  vermiculate  pat- 
tern over  the  liver  which  has  grown  posteriorly,  replacing  the  yolk. 

NINETEEN-DAY   LARVA 

Figure  134  shows  a  larva  at  19  days  of  age.  Differences  in  size  among 
the  larvae  have  now  become  evident,  a  few  lagging  noticeably  in  their 
growth.  There  has  been  a  substantial  increase  in  the  relative  size  of  the 


Figure  134.     Nineteen-day  larva.  Total  length  7.6  mm. 

head  and  anterior  regions  of  the  trunk.  The  entire  body  has  become 
markedly  deeper.  Branchiostegal  rays,  which  were  first  observed  at  14 
days,  can  be  seen  clearly.  The  area  below  the  eye  has  expanded  broadly 
and  formed  a  deep  preopercle.  The  margin  of  this  structure  bears  from 
five  to  nine  short  spines  which  are  situated  in  clusters  of  two  or  three 
each.  The  preopercle  has  an  acute-angled  corner  and  in  some  specimens 
a  well-defined  spine  is  here  formed.  The  eye  is  bright  with  accumulated 
guanin  and  its  antero-dorsal  surface  shows  a  patch  of  metallic  green. 
Back  of  the  eye  the  chain  of  circumorbital  bones  has  expanded  consid- 
erably, its  other  parts  remaining  narrow.  The  otic  capsule  has  assumed 
a  triangular  outline. 

The  gills  can  now  be  seen  to  be  richly  supplied  with  blood,  and  strong 
currents  of  water  pass  through  the  mouth  when  the  jaws  are  opened  and 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OF   CLINOCOTTUS   RECALVUS  293 

closed.  This  current  was  first  observed  at  13  days.  Whether  or  not  respira- 
tion was  confined  entirely  to  the  vitelline  circulation  prior  to  that  time  is 
not  known. 

Rays  can  be  seen  in  the  pectoral  fins  when  the  latter  are  seen  against 
a  light  background.  Just  back  of  the  vertical  of  the  anus,  11  compressed 
nodes  appear  on  the  body  margin.  They  originate  from  the  ventral  sep- 
tum, one  per  segment.  In  later  development  it  was  noted  that  these  are 
the  ends  of  the  interhaemal  bones.  In  the  region  where  these  project, 
each  myotome  has  assumed  a  sharp  angle  in  its  outline.  The  end  of  the 
tail  now  curves  upward  to  a  greater  degree,  and  extending  downward 
and  to  the  rear  are  about  10  ill-defined  rays  which  arc  represented  merely 
by  bars  of  material  somewhat  more  opaque  than  the  surrounding  tissue, 
and  which  are  expanded  and  contiguous  at  their  distal  ends.  These 
changes  in  the  tail  have  brought  the  melanophores,  which  formerly  la.\ 
in  the  ventral  finfold,  into  contact  with  the  mosl  venl  ral  of  the  developing 
caudal  rays.  The  anterior  two  or  three  melanophores  of  the  series  on 
the  ventral  surface  are  now  found  in  the  septum  well  up  in  the  body 
away  from  the  margin. 

All  of  the  melanophores  in  the  anterior  regions  of  the  body  have 
become  much  heavier.  On  each  side  those  over  the  body  cavity  curve 
down  and  sharply  inward  at  the  upper  limit  of  the  descending  gut.  The 
number  of  melanophores  in  this  region  appears  to  be  unchanged.  On 
the  anterior  surface  of  the  head  there  are  now  about  U.~>  to  30  melano- 
phores, and  35  to  40  occur  over  the  top  of  the  head.  The  number  of  mel- 
anophores over  the  nape  is  aboul  the  same.  With  the  increased  forward 
extension  of  muscle  segments,  thr< r  four  melanophores  from  the  sur- 
face of  the  cerebellum  now  come  to  lie  on  the  surface  of  the  muscles  them- 
selves. Much  diffuse  melanin  is  presenl  below  and  medial  to  the  otic  cap- 
sules. Diffuse  xanthin  has  increased  in  the  regions  where  it  was  originally 
described. 

TWENTY-SEVEN-DAY    LARVA 

A  larva  of  '21  days  appears  in  Figure  1  :!•">.  In  total  length  it  measures 
only  8.3  mm,  but  its  increase  in  girth  has  ben  in  much  greater  propor- 
tion. The  spines  on  the  margin  of  the  preopercle  have  grown  in  length 
and  can  be  seen  to  be  united  by  a  membranous  web.  The  acute  angle  of 
the  peropercle  is  lost  and  it  is  now  quite  broadly  rounded.  Other  elements 
of  the  operculum  can  be  seen  just  beyond  the  margin  of  the  preopercle 
as  a  vague  narrow  crescent,  poorly  defined  against  the  underlying  gill 
membranes.  The  eyes  are  beginning  to  migrate  dorsally  and  their  anterior 
surfaces  are  covered  with  a  heavy  layer  of  melanin.  The  otic  capsule  is 
now  a  trilobate  structure  being  encroached  upon  by  the  folds  of  the  brain 
and  the  dorsal  extension  of  the  operculum. 

^^s **»'**  -*■  '-r*L  -       -    -'-     v v  .  ^^& 

§(5)  Jgi     ••::1^3^-_^;^^ss^  .  ■     - 


Figure  135.     Twenty-seven  day  larva.  Total  length  8.3  mm. 


-  - 

■      •  am  in  length  but  have 

-   -  b       st  the  mottled  back- 

■    -  ppeared  as  small 

-  -  - 

-    -  ••_■■-  at.  From  the  ends 

-  -  -     -  ihe  anal  fin  can  now  be  seen  to  be 

■      -■      •  '    ■        adal  except  that  they 

They  are  most  dense  and 

gradually      -      stinet  at  their 

subtly  into  the  finfold.  On  the 

suras,  the  soft  dorsal  rays 

t  of  the  soft         -  s  from  the  ends 

5  early  as  the  similar  development 

-         -  -  .         ts  rate  is  rapid  and  at 

-  ■    _  -  -     ■      -  s  of  the  two  fins  are  about  equal  in 

the  sofil         -  th.  fkif olds  has  produced  marked 

sen      from  the  figure.  The 

:te  different.  The  spines  appear  at 

s  of  th*  interneurals  remaining  imbedded 

•      •  -  |  -  entire  development.  From  the  outset,  the 

-  sharply  defined  and  are  thus  easily 

_•     -  ]  -  .    ■     -  -     The   appearance   of  the 

in  that  they  are  now  longer  and  slightly 

oiward  deflection,  the  end  of  the  vertebral  eol- 

_         ■        ■  ;rve.  Their  outgrowth  has  carried 

jin  leaving  the  outline  with  a 

-  -  -.1  spines  in  the  caudal  region  are 
this  1 

_■  •        -  the  outlines  of  almost  all  of  the 

I 

-"    ges  appear  to  be  somewhat 

s  of  1  gjh.  this  i  -duetion  may 

larvae  have  a  much  lighter  coloration. 

.    -  .  te  that  this  change  in  coloration 

■--  -  "       benthonic  habit.  A  large  niel- 

premaxillary  and  the  latter 

Melanophores  have  appeared 

■  -         "    "    Melanin,  both  diffuse 

-        -       .  s,  is  'it  in  the  region  medial  to  the 

9    a  melanin,  and 

"he  anterior  one-thir 

-  nedsoi   -  diffuse  melanin. 

-  -id.  nape,  and  body  cavity  now 

.re  now 

•  ear  at  their  respective 

I 

TH    RTY- FOUR -DAY    LARVA 

.  .  J  mal  died.  am    - 

f  th<  i  uncle  a'        rer  'he  body 

ue  and  the  contours 

ilar 


..HLT  DEV.  . 

::.argin  of  the  preoperele  now  appears  to  follow 
the  membrane  which  inelndes  the  preoperenlar  spines 

ntinued  its  upward  migration 
:'  the  most  anterior  visible  elements  of  the  brain.  The 
psule  has  become  darker,  obscuring  the  detail  me- 
dial * 

fins  have  now  acquired  suJr 
in  1*  it  deta 

Spines  o  the  median 

he  most 

itly  and  about  8  or  1'         I         .iddle  or  vided  inl 

posterior  end  of  I 
■ 

ils  and  interhaemals. 


- 

S 

stribul  juate 

in  the  figure. 

■ 
~     :.  on  the  spines  that  fin.  S 

:»ear  on  "  ral  fin  and  r 

3 

-    'f  melanophores  on  v 
•he  anal  "  f  this  series  :owe 

y  upward  inl  .udal  fin  and  are  in  intii- 

the  I  indant  throughon 

and  head,  and  1  — n  in  th    I 

phores  are  pr  ~  -rtheb«»  -  -rspa 

the  melanop:        -  are  also  heo  r.ead 

about  one-half  its  length,  the  indi 
the:  -       i-oming  smaller  posteriorly. 

oment  two  small  spines  were  noted 
-aeh  otie  capsule 
attained  a  maximum  length  of  about  0 
appeared  like  developing  cirri  H  re  transiti 

rhe  larva  showed  that  the 
phied.  Their      si  s  :-ent  back  toward  the  boo 

eneased  in  a  low.  fleshy  cap.  From  this  point  on.  their  identi 
pletely  lost.  Als  lays     here  formed  in  the  1 

t—i 


(  Al.li'Mi;\  |  .\    ri-ll    AMI    CA.MI. 


ctly  back  of  the  descending  gut  a  peneil-like  downward  extrusion 

arkened  material.  It  grew  rapidly  bu1  developed  some  curvature  and 

therefore  did  not  extend  below  the  venter.   At   seven  weeks  this  had 

enlarged  and  developed  mure  curvature  and  was  assumed  to  be  part  of 

the  urogenital  system. 

SEVEN-WEEK    LARVA 

Although  it  is  not  yet  fully  metamorphosed,  The  animal  now  leads 
anal      s1      :clusively  demersal  existence. 

preoperele  has  undergone  striking  change.  Its  uppermost  spine 

s   engthened  greatly  and  to  a  lesser  extent  one  or  two  directly  below  it 

have  also  grown.  The  remainder  of  the  preopercular  spines  have  become 

included  in  The  solidified  margin  of  The  preoperele  and  cannot  now  be 

n  e  upper  spines  are  still  quite  delicate  and  are  difficult  to  make 

out  in  The  Lateral  view,  due  To  The  increase  of  pigment  in  that  area.  The 

]•  jaw  extends  below  the  angle  of  The  preoperele  and  That  angle  is 
s1   under  a  fleshy  covering.  The  other  elements  of  the  gill  covers  have 
grown  considerably  but  are  as  yet  indistinguishable. 

Anion-  The  specimens  There  is  a  great  discrepancy  regarding  the 
position  of  The  eves  at  this  time.  In  some  They  lie  almost  at  the  outline 
of  The  head  but  in  most  they  are  in  about  the  position  shown  in  Fig- 
ure 137.  Tlie  melanin  cap  of  the  eye  now  extends  down  on  each  side  of 
the  eyeball.  Each  of  the  olfactory  capsules  now  bears  a  robust  spine 
and  both  pairs  of  nares  are  visible. 

The  pectoral  fins  have  become  heavy  with  rays  well  defined  in  their 
proximal  portions.  The  ends  of  the  rays  are  still  flattened  and  grade  into 
the  surrounding  membrane,  except  the  lowermost  four  or  five  which  are 
clearly  defined  for  their  entire  length.  Segmentation  is  (dear  in  all  of  the 
rays  and  The  membrane  is  incised  heTween  the  ends  of  the  lower  five.  The 
pelvic  fins  have  increased  greatly  in  length  and  the  rays  can  be  made  out 
but  a  spine  cannot  be  s< 

In  the  spinous  dorsal,  the  centrally  located  spines  have  become  ele- 
vated and  all  spines  have  grown  in  length.  In  the  soft  dorsal  and  anal 
fins,  the  ray>.  are  divided  into  two  or  three  segments  and  are  clearly 
defined  except  at  their  distal  ends  where  they  are  still  flat  and  "brush- 
like."" The  caudal  rays  show  comparable  development  except  in  the  dor- 
sal and  ventral  edges  where  they  merge  and  are  without  separate  iden- 
tities. In  the  tail  the  haemal  spines  have  fused  into  a  hypural  plate  which 
has  a  conspicuous  thickening  extending  down  and  back  from  the  proxi- 
mal end  of  the  urostvle. 


.  s  .-^.„.^, 


Figure  137.     Seven-week  larva.  Total  length  10.8  mm. 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OF  CLINOCOTTUS  RECALVUS         297 

The  melanophores  over  the  body  cavity  are  quite  indistinct  due  to 
the  increased  thi<-knps>  of  the  body  wall.  The  distribution  of  the  melano- 
phores over  the  head  is  adequately  shown  in  Figure  137.  Large  mela- 
nophores are  found  on  the  rays  of  the  pectoral  fins,  forming  three  or  four 
ill-defined  bars  across  the  latter.  Over  the  dorsum,  the  posterior  spread 
of  melanophores  from  tin-  nape  has  extended  laterally  and  reaches  mid- 
way between  the  origin  of  the  pectoral  fins  and  the  anus.  These  mela- 
nophores  extend  forward  over  the  base  of  the  pectoral  fin  and  are  con- 
tinuous with  those  which  originated  there.  Melanophores  lying  in  close 
iciation  with  the  spines  of  the  dorsal  form  three  reasonably  well- 
defined  bars  across  that  fin.  A  few  small  melanophores  are  also  found 
in  the  membrane.  Two  small  areas  of  melanophores  are  found  on  the  dor- 
sum near  the  junction  of  the  spinous  and  soft  dorsal  fins.  Little  change 
is  to  be  noted  in  the  series  of  melanophores  along  the  ventral  surfac< 
the  tail  except  that  the  anterior  ones  are  becoming  obscured  by  the 
thickening  of  the  body.  Melanin  on  the  spinal  cord  has  continued  to 
increase.  Xanthophores  have  increased  in  number  and  have  spread  pos- 
teriorly so  that  they  are  now  found  over  the  entire  body.  Larger  xan- 
thophores are  conspicuous  '>n  the  spinal  cord.  The  increase  in  intensity 
of  the  coloration  of  the  xantliopln.i-.-N  is  steady  and  after  the  sixth  week 
of  development  there  were  some  which  could  probably  !>••  termed  erythro- 
phores.  These  reddish  pigment  cells  are  now  particularly  conspicuous 
over  the  head  and  along  the  lateral  midline  of  the  body,  back  to  about 
the  vertical  of  the  anus.  Guanophores  made  their  appearance  on  the 

opercular  elements  of  some  of  the  S] imens  at  six  weeks  of  a'_r--  and  at 

seven  weeks  they  are  --till  difficult  to  study  and  can  be  seen  only  under 
optimum  conditions.  The  pale,  translucent  >_rr«->-!i  pigment  common  in 
the  flesh  of  -  ttids  was  first  noted  about  the  head  and  pectoral 

regions  when  the  larvae  were  about  six  weeks  old. 

The  ann>  has  moved  anteriorly  and  has  caused  the  trunk  to  become 

somewhat  shorter  and  deeper  in  relation  to  the  size  and  shape  of  the  head. 

%  Iii    Figure    138    appear    the 

i  rcular  el         ts  at  eighl 

l/y 0         of  age.  At  this  time  the  long  spine 

fer??^^/  c  n    ot"   T^ie   PreoPercle   is   develop 

- — ^^    /  ^    a   slight   upward   curve   and   the 

PO -   /"      }     /  remaining  spines   have  been  lost 

/         I   I  through     —         "ion  of  their  mem- 

10 " i~*    I J  branous  investment.  The  bony  di- 

I          [/  visions   of  the   gill   cover  can  be 

/        y  clearly  seen. 

J    y/  <  l<>se  examination  of  the  pel- 

^^^  vie  fin  at  eight  weeks  shows  the 

Figure   13S.     Opercular    elements    at    eight    spine  developing  in  intimate  aS£ 
weeks.  PO  =  preopercle :  O  =  opercle  ;  SO  =       •    ,  •  •   1      1       n 

subopercle  ;  IO  =  interopercle.  CiatlOn  With  the  first  SOf  t  ray. 

TEN-WEEK   FISH 

The  larger  specimens  of  10-week-old  fish  are  about  20.0  mm.  in  total 
length.  The  1S.0  mm.  specimen  represented  in  Figure  139  was  killed 
prior  to  preparation  of  the  drawing  and  a<  a  result  the  rays  of  the 
pectoral  fins  are  pulled  together,  the  gill  covers  are  flared,  and  the 
mvotomes  are  obscured. 


298 


<   \I.II''mi;\]  \    PISH    ami  GAME 


The  preopercle  with  its long  curved  spine  is  quite  conspicuous. 

Growth  <>r  tin-  livvihv  uv.t  tlir  iiilicr  iipcrcular  elements  obscures  their 
margins  excepl  for  pari  of  the  line  demarking  the  interoperele  from 
tin-  subopercle.  The  lower  angle  of  the  preopercle  is  also  overgrown.  The 
opercle  imu  extends  back  and  its  upper  lobe  lies  over  the  base  of  the 
pectoral  fin.  The  principal  exil  of  the  water  passing  over  the  gills  is 
marked  by  ;i  wide,  well-defined  groove  at  the  upper  limit  of  the  oper- 
culum. Both  pairs  of  nares  have  developed  definite  tubes  by  this  time. 

The  eyes  have  advanced  so  thai  they  now  form  part  of  the  outline 

of  the  head.  Melanin  in  tl \<'s  has  increased  somewhat,  following  the 

pattern  previously  described.  The  lower  halves  of  the  pectoral  fins  now 
have  incised  margins  and  their  rays  are  well  defined. 


re  139.      Ten-week  fish.  Total  length  18.0  mm. 

The  membrane  of  the  anal  fin  shows  slight  incision.  The  dorsal  fins 
show  no  significant  change.  The  caudal  rays  are  well  defined  except  at 
the  distal  ends  which  do  not  reach  the  margin  of  the  fin.  From  their 
termination  to  the  margin  of  the  membrane,  they  are  represented  by 
delicate  undulating  lines,  several  of  which  extend  out  from  the  end  of 
each  ray.  If  such  a  condition  existed  in  any  of  the  other  fins  during 
their  development,  it  was  overlooked. 

The  large  dendritic  melanophores  seen  throughout  the  development 
in  various  parts  of  the  body  now  persist  only  on  the  pectoral  fin  where 
they  form  three  or  four  ill-defined  bars  on  or  close  to  the  rays.  Two  rows 
of  somewhat  smaller  melanophores  are  situated  across  the  base  of  the 
pectoral  fins.  At  this  time,  the  color  of  the  fish  is  imparted  dominantly 
by  erythrophores  which  have  shown  great  increase  in  numbers.  They 
are  now  found  on  all  parts  of  the  body  and  occasionally  a  few  are  seen 
in  the  membranes  of  the  fins.  Whether  or  not  the  domination  of  this 
particular  pigment  is  due  to  environmental  conditions  is  not  known. 
The  general  patterns  followed  by  the  red  and  yellow  are  the  same.  Over 
the  head  and  anterior  one-half  of  the  trunk,  xanthophores  are  abundant 
and  in  close  association  with  the  erythrophores.  Posteriorly,  the  xan- 
thophores are  less  frequent.  Melanophores  are  also  present  in  the  con- 
centrations of  erythrophores  over  the  areas  where  the  former  are  shown 
in  Figure  137,  but  their  posterior  spread  has  been,  with  exception  of  a 
few  isolated  individuals,  masked  by  the  increasing  abundance  of  guano- 
phores.  These  last  mentioned  pigment  cells  cover  the  melanophores 
quite  effectively  but  are  not  prominent  in  the  areas  dominated  by  red 
and  yellow.  A  concentration  of  guanophores  forms  a  pale  triangle  over 
the  head  which  is  surrounded  by  broad,  dark  lines  formed  by  concen- 
trations of  red,  yellow,  and  black.  The  base  of  the  triangle  extends  across 


EARLY  DEVELOPMENT  OF  CLIXOCOTTUS  RECALVUS 


299 


the  head  at  about  the  posterior  margin  of  the  eyes,  and  its  apex  is  formed 
by  two  dark  lines  converging  just  anterior  to  the  origin  of  the  spinous 
dorsal.  The  lateral  angles  of  this  triangle  are  directly  above  the  spine  of 
each  preopercle.  Heavy  pigmentation  covers  the  anterior  surface  of  the 
head  between  the  eyes  and  extends  down  to  cover  the  anterior  two-thirds 
of  the  upper  jaws.  The  region  of  the  operculum  and  preoperculum,  below 
and  behind  the  eye,  is  dominated  by  a  broad  band  of  guanophores.  Pos- 
terior to  the  triangle  tnenl  ioned  above  is  a  wide  band  of  somewhat  lighter 
coloration  extending  down  and  forward  on  each  side  from  aboul  the 
origin  of  the  spinous  dorsal.  This  is  followed  by  a  heavy  saddle-shaped 
band  of  red.  Posteriorly,  bars  alternately  dominated  by  guanophores 
and  erythrophores  extend  across  the  back.  The  red  areas  are  continuous 
with  a  band  of  erythrophores  which  originates  anteriorly  around  the 
base  of  the  pectoral  fin  and  passes  posteriorly.  This  band  lias  a  wavy 
ventral  margin.  There  is  a  ratlin-  isolated  patch  of  red  over  the  caudal 
peduncle.  Along  the  sides  of  the  body,  about  parallel  with  the  vertebral 
column,  is  a  band  of  erythrophores  which  follows  the  urostyle  in  the  tail. 
'I  here  is  also  a  vertical  hand  of  ml  down  the  side  of  the  tail  from  the 
vertical  of  the  end  of  the  urostyle.  The  entire  contents  of  the  body 
cavity  have  assumed  a  heavy  v^*\  color  hut  this  is  perhaps  imparted 

h\    the  diet  of  copepods  upon  which  the  fish  have  fed. 

Two  pores  of  the  hi t »t;i I  line  system  now  appear  in  front  of  each 
eye  and  two  r;m  lie  seen  in  the  hit  erorbit  a  I  space.   A  slender  cirrus  now 

appears  over,  and  just  posterior  to,  each  eye.  Well-defined  scales  occur 
along  the   lateral   line    from    the    posterior    margin    of   the   operculum 

to  aboul    the   vertical   of  the  anus.   These  scales   1 ome   less  distinct 

posteriorly. 

FOURTEEN-WEEK    FISH 

Figure  140  represents  a  fish  14  weeks  of  age,  measuring  24.3  mm. 
in  total  length.  At  this  time  it  may  he  treated  satisfactorily  with  the 
taxonomic  keys  id'  Bolin  i  1!'4  1  .  Color  changes  include  heavier  develop- 
ment of  melanophores,  guanophores,  and  erythrophores  in  the  areas 
where  they  earlier  appeared,  as  well  as  a  general  spread  of  melanophores 
caudally,  the  latter  coming  to  occupy  those  areas  formerly  held  by  the 
red  and  yellow  pigments  alone.  Bars  of  melanophores  show  plainly  on 
the  two  dorsal  tins  and  a  similar  effect  produced  by  erythrophores  is 
present  on  the  caudal.  Four  or  five  bars  of  melanophores  are  present  on 
the  pectoral  fins.  The  pelvies  and  anal  remain  unmarked.  The  ground 


Figure  140.     Fourteen-week  fish.  Total  length  24.3  mm. 


:«)()  (  ALIFOKNIA   FISH   AND   GAME 

color  of  the  entire  animal  is  a  yellowish  green  and  is  much  lighter  than 
thai  of  adull  specimens.  The  scales  which  appeared  temporarily  in  the 
anterior  one-third  of  the  lateral  line  are  overgrown  by  skin.  The  post- 
orbital  cirrus  of  each  side  is  now  followed  by  three  more  cirri  and  three 
or  four  lie  .11  intervals  along  the  anterior  part  of  the  lateral  line.  The 
spin.'  of  the  preopercle  has  become  shortened  and  thickened.  The  anus 
lies  well  in  the  middle  one-third  of  the  distance  between  the  base  of  the 
pelvic  tins  and  the  origin  of  the  anal. 

According  to  Bolin  (1944),  the  young  of  Clinocottus  globict  ps 
Girard  .  when  ;it  this  stage  of  development,  are  indistinguishable  from 
those  "I'  Clinocottus  recalvus  on  the  basis  of  morphology,  and  cue  must 
rely  on  the  range  to  make  the  determination.  This  difficulty  is  due  to 
the  late  development  of  cirri  in  the  anterior  half  of  the  interorbital  space 
in  Clinocottus  globia  /is.  these  not  making  their  appearance  until  the 
specimens  are  at  least  35  mm.  in  length. 

Beyond  the  stages  of  development  dealt  with  in  the  present  paper, 
adequate  descriptions  are  to  be  found  in  the  literature. 

REFERENCES 
Bolin,  Rolf  L. 

1941.     Embryonic  and   early  larval   stages  of  the  cottid  fish   Orthonopias   triads 
Starks  and  Mann.  Stanford  Iehthyol.  Bull.,  vol.  2,  no.  3,  p.  73-82,  25  figs. 
1'.i44.      A  review  of  the  marine  cottid  fishes  of  California.  Ibid.,  vol.  3,  no.  1,  p.  1-135, 
4d  figs. 
Budd,  Paul  L. 

L940.     Development  of  the  eggs  and  early  larvae  of  six  California  fishes.  Calif.  Div. 
Fish  and  Game,  Fish  Bull.  56,  53  p.,  13  ids. 
Eigenmann,  Carl  H. 

1890.     On  the  egg  membranes  and  micropyle  of  some  osseous  fishes.  Harvard  Mus. 

Comp.  Zool.,  Bull.,  vol.  19,  no.  2,  p.  129-ir,4.  '■'•  pis. 
1892.     The  fishes  of  San  Diego,  California.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Proa,  vol.  15,  no.  897, 
p.  123-17S,  9  pis. 
Wilson.  Henry  Y. 

ls-.il.     The  embryologj  of  the  sea  bass  I  Serranus  atrarius).  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  Bull., 
v..l.  '.».  lss-.i.  P.  209-277.  20  pis. 


PLASTIC  DETERIORATION  AND  METAL  CORRO 
SION  IN  PETERSEN  DISK  FISH  TAGS1 

By  A.  J.  <  'alhoi  n 

I '.hi. -.hi  >>\  Fish  <  Jonserval  ion 

and 

l».  II.  Fey,  -Ik.,  and  E.  P.  in  ghes 

Bureau  of  Marine  Fisheries 

INTRODUCTION 

Petersen-type  tags  are  currently  bring  used  extensively  along  the 
Pacific  Coast  from  California  to  Alaska  in  connection  with  fish  tagging 

programs  ran^i  ng  fr very  simple  migration  sunlit  to  elaborate  and 

precise  population  determinations.  They  have  been  used  on  more  than 
:!<)  species  of  fishes  in  California  alone. 

These  tags  consisl  of  tun  plastic  disks  beld  againsl  the  fish  by  a  pin 
through  both  disks  and  some  part  of  the  fish's  bodj  usually  the  base 
of  the  dorsal  fin  or  the  caudal  peduncle.  Tin-  disks  ride  on  the  pins  like 
wheels  on  an  axle.  A  tag  in  place  on  a  starry  flounder  is  shown  in 
Figure  141. 

For  some  time  the  wriiers  have  been  disturbed  by  the  loss  of  tags 
due  t<>  corrosion  of  the  pins  in  salt  water  and  to  breakage  of  the  disks, 

and  the  effect  that  such  losses  could  ha\ i  the  validity  "!'  conclusions 

drawn  Prom  certain  types  of  tagging  experiments.  This  concern  led  to 
the  aquarium  testing  of  various  metals  commonly  used  with  Petersen 
disks  and  to  the  critical  examination  of  disks  and  pins  returned  from 
tish  tallied  at  sea  which,  in  turn,  provided  the  material  for  this  progress 
report.  Results  of  corrosion  and  deterioration  tests  accumulate  slowly, 
and  it  seemed  desirable  to  make  this  information  immediatelj  available 
toother  fisheries  workers  who  may  be  unaware  of  the  serious  shortcomings 
of  some  of  the  metals  and  plastics  in  common  use  for  these  tags. 

It  should  be  noted  in  passing  that  the  writers  do  not  believe  that 
the  Petersen  disk  is  an  ideal  fish  tag,  even  when  it  stays  free  of  metal 
corrosion  and  plastic  breakage.  The  design  has  many  disadvantages.  It 
is  slow  to  apply,  does  not  allow  for  much  growth  of  the  fish,  and  is  overly 
apt  to  catch  on  nets.  Some  advantages  are  that  it  is  less  apt  to  be  over- 
looked than  any  other  well-tested  design,  and  that  it  can  be  attached  to 
a  wide  variety  id'  fishes.  In  certain  tagging  programs  the  disadvantages 
are  serious,  and  efforts  are  being  made  in  California  and  elsewhere  to 
develop  a  different  type  of  tag  which  will  overcome  them.  Meanwhile, 
disk  tags  are  commonly  the  most  suitable  type  available ;  hence  their 
widespread  use. 

We  wish  to  express  our  appreciation  to  Dr.  E.  S.  Herald  of  the 
Steinhart  Aquarium,  San  Francisco,  and  to  members  of  his  staff  for 

1  Submitted  for  publication  March,  1951. 


i   301    i 


302 


<    \l.ll'iil;\  I  \    11-11     AM>    GA  ME 


J 


Figure  141.  Starry  flounder  (Platichthys  stellatus)  with  Petersen  disk  tag  in  place. 
The  wire  passes  through  the  fish  and  holds  a  second  disk  in  place  on  its  far  side.  The 
knotlike  twist  of  the  wire  shown  here  is  in  general  use  on  the  Pacific  Coast.  Photograph 

by  D.  H.  Fry,  Jr. 

their  wholehearted  cooperation.  Without  the  facilities  of  the  aquarium, 
the  work  would  have  been  far  more  difficult  and  less  conclusive. 


DETERIORATION   OF   PLASTIC    DISKS 

The  disks  used  by  the  California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game  have 
been  fabricated  from  several  different  materials.  They  are  cut  from 
plastic  sheets  built  up  of  three  thin  laminations.  One  member  of  each 
pair  is  serially  numbered  and  the  other  carries  brief  instructions  to  the 
finder.  The  printing  is  on  the  middle,  opaque  layer,  and  the  two  outer 
layers  are  transparent.  Laminating  serves  the  double  function  of  protect- 
ing the  printing  and  strengthening  the  disk.  This  design  has  been  used 
widely  and  found  to  be  generally  satisfactory. 

Cellulose   Nitrate 

The  earliest  disk  tags  used  by  the  Division  were  made  of  cellulose 
nitrate  (celluloid).  They  were  a  half  inch  in  diameter  (12.7  mm.)  and 
0.030  inches  thick  (0.76  mm.).  They  proved  entirely  satisfactory  for  the 
first  few  years  after  manufacturing.  However,  after  six  to  eight  years  of 
storage  they  became  somewhat  brittle,  and  an  appreciable  number  of 
those  placed  on  salmon  cracked  while  the  fish  were  on  the  spawning  beds. 
No  cracking  was  noted  when  some  of  these  same  tags  were  used  recently 
on  striped  bass.  Much  smaller  numbers  were  involved  in  the  latter  in- 
stance, and  the  tags  were  not  subjected  to  the  battering  they  received  on 
spawning  salmon. 


DETERIORATION  AND   CORROSION  IN  DISK  FISH  TAGS  303 

In  a  more  recent  order  of  cellulose  nitrate  tags,  the  disks  were  larger 
(iVinch  diameter).  They  showed  no  tendency  to  crack  in  spite  of  the 
extra  strain  imposed  by  the  larger  diameter. 

The  desirability  of  greater  thickness  in  nitrate  tags  to  further  in- 
crease their  strength  remains  to  be  evaluated. 

Two  later  orders  were  filled  with  cellulose  acetate  and  with  Vinylite 
disks,  used  by  others  and  presumed  to  be  satisfactory.  They  have  had 
serious  shortcomings,  which  are  outlined  below,  and  recent  efforts  to 
reorder  nitrate  tags  have  met  with  difficulties;  few  manufacturers  will 
now  handle,  the  material  because  of  the  fire  hazard  involved.  Moreover, 
w  ith  the  advent  of  the  newer,  less-inflammable  plastics,  nitrate  is  becom 
ing  increasingly  difficult  to  obtain  in  .sheet  form.  A  manufacturer  willing 
to  fill  an  order  for  nitrate  tags  has  recently  been  located.  However,  judg- 
ing from  the  difficulties  encountered  in  locating  this  source,  they  may 
eventually  be  unobtainable. 

Cellulose   Acetate 

Our  first  acetate  tags  were  ^-inch  in  diameter  and  0.030  inch 
thick.  Workmanship  was  excellent,  hut  the  acetate  was  softer  and  more 
flexible  than  t  he  nitrate.  Moreover,  this  material  absorbs  a  relatively  large 
amouni  of  water,  scarcely  an  advantage  in  a  plasl  ic  fish  tag.  These  acetate 
tags  were  satisfactory  od  flatfish,  but  they  were  an  alarming  failure  on 
salmon.  After  a  spawning  migration  which  is  often  Long  and  rough,  the 
salmon  dig  nests  and  Sgh1  vigorously  on  the  spawning  grounds.  The  final 
result  is  thai  thej  damage  the  acetate  tags  to  an  extenl  unapproached  by 

any  other  species  studied.  Al s1  as  many  salmon  were  recovered  in  the 

spawning  grounds  with  fresh  tag  scars  and  no  tags  as  with  tags  still  in 
place.  Most  of  the  disks  recovered  were  battered,  cracked,  and  ready  to 
fall  off.  Typical  examples  are  shown  in  the  bottom  row  in  Figure  14'2. 
Pin  corrosion  may  have  caused  shedding  in  a  few  instances,  but  most  of 
the  loss  could  he  attributed  with  certainty  to  failure  of  the  disks.  Fre- 
quently, one  disk  would  break  off  entirely,  and  the  other  would  be  recov- 
ered with  the  pin.  Most  of  these  salmon  were  tagged  in  fresh  water  and 
recovered  so  soon  that  pin  corrosion  was  not  a  consideration.  Such  fish 
could  be  distinguished  by  absence  of  the  adipose  fin,  which  was  removed 
when  they  were  tagged. 

Following  this  unfortunate  experience  with  cellulose  acetate,  we 
decided  to  return  to  nitrate  tags,  but  at  that  time  we  were  unable  to  find 
anyone  who  would  make  them.  In  desperation,  an  order  was  placed  for 
cellulose  acetate  disks  a  half  inch  in  diameter  and  0.045  inches  thick,  the 
maximum  thickness  which  the  maker's  lamination  press  could  handle 
without  spoiling  the  printing.  It  was  hoped  that  the  reduced  diameter 
and  increased  thickness  would  give  greater  strength.  These  tags  have 
proved  reasonably  successful  even  on  salmon.  They  show  far  more 
scratches,  cuts,  and  wear  than  do  the  nitrate  disks,  but  they  will  get  us 
by  if  nitrate  cannot  be  obtained.  Twenty  king  salmon  carrying  these 
thick  acetate  disks  were  recovered  after  spawning  by  Marine  Fisheries 
field  men.  One  tag  was  missing  and  one  was  damaged  enough  to  weaken 
it  slightly.  The  remaining  38  were  in  good  condition.  Twenty-five  tagged 
king  salmon  were  among  the  fish  taken  for  spawning  purposes  by  the 
Coleman  Hatchery  crew.  There  was  one  tag  missing  and  one  bent  and 
cracked.  The  remaining  48  were  in  good  condition.  Salmon  held  in  a 


I  A.LIPORN  I  \    l  IMI    AM)   CAME 


Figure  142.  Defective  tags.  The  single  disk  in  the  top  row  is  Vinylite  and  broke  while 
on  a  striped  bass  {Roccus  saxatilis).  Note  the  sharp  fracture,  which  is  typical  of  this 
material.  The  three  tags  in  the  bottom  row  are  cellulose  acetate  (0.030  inch  thick, 
Vie  inch  diameter).  They  were  recovered  from  spawned-out  king  salmon  (Oncorhyn- 
chus  tshawytscha)  and  are  all  too  typical  of  thin  acetate  tags  recovered  on  the  spawn- 
ing beds.  Photograph  by  D.  H.  Fry,  Jr. 

hatchery  pen  will  damage  tags  but  usually  the  collective  damage  is  not 
as  severe  as  on  the  spawning  grounds. 

Vinylite 
While  men  working  with  salmon  were  having  trouble  with  cellulose 
acetate  tags,  another  crew  was  tagging  striped  bass  with  Vinylite  disks 
of  the  sort  used  earlier  for  this  species  on  the  Atlantic  Coast  (Merriman, 
1941).  They  proved  to  be  unduly  brittle.  Sharply  cracked  disks  were 
returned  frequently.  The  one  shown  in  the  top  row  in  Figure  142  is 
typical.  Use  of  this  material  has  been  discontinued  in  favor  of  cellulose 
nitrate,  for  which  a  source  has  recently  been  found.  However,  if  the 
latter  cannot  be  obtained  in  the  future,  it  will  be  desirable  to  compare 
the  qualities  of  the  thicker  (0.045  inch)  acetate  tags  with  Vinylite  ones 
of  the  same  thickness.  The  brittleness  of  the  latter  material  may  prove  to 
be  less  of  a  disadvantage  than  the  weakness  of  acetate. 

CORROSION    OF   METAL  WIRES 

Corrosion  tests  have  been  performed  at  the  Steinhart  Aquarium  on 
Monel  wire  of  two  types,  nickel  pins  of  two  batches,  nickel  wire,  stainless 
steel  wire  and  tantalum  wire.  Some  Monel  strap  tags  were  also  tested.  Of 
these,  only  stainless  steel  and  tantalum  show  real  promise. 

The  tests  were  carried  out  by  tagging  striped  bass  (Roccas  saxatilis) 
about  15  inches  long,  and  examining  them  at  such  irregular  intervals  as 
our  other  work  would  permit.  Tags  were  attached  under  the  first  dorsal 


DETERIORATION   AXD   CORROSION   IN  DISK  FISH   TAGS 


305 


fin,  under  the  second  dorsal,  and  on  the  caudal  peduncle.  Most  of  the  fish 
had  three  sets  of  tags. 

Some  of  the  metals  used  in  these  tests  are  commonly  supposed  to  be 
rather  immune  to  the  action  of  sea  water  but  actually  corroded  rapidly 
to  the  point  of  failure.  Such  corrosion  appears  to  have  been  at  least 
partially  due  to  a  concentration-cell  effect.  This  phenomenon  is  related 
to  the  much  better  known  galvanic  action.  Galvanic  action  occurs  when 
two  unlike  metals  are  immersed  in  an  electrolyte  such  as  sea  water.  A 
concent  ration-cell  action  occurs  when  one  metal  is  immersed  in  two  con- 
centrations of  an  electrolyte  or  in  two  unlike  electrolytes.  The  body  fluids 
of  the  fish  and  the  ocean  water  are  evidently  sufficiently  different  to 
cause  such  corrosion  in  some  metals  which  would  easily  withstand  a  simple 
immersion  test. 

The  writers  considered  the  possibility  that  conditions  in  the 
aquarium  might  be  more  corrosive  than  in  the  ocean,  and  that  corrosion 
of  one  metal  might  vary  among  different  species  of  fishes  ;  hence,  careful 
examination  was  made  of  returned  tags  from  all  the  fish  being  recovered 
in  central  and  northern  California.  This  demonstrated  thai  nickel  pins 
corroded  more  rapidly  in  the  aquarium  than  in  the  ocean,  hut  they  did 
corrode  in  both  places.  This  difference  could  not  he  demonstrated  with 
other  materials.  As  possible  reasons  for  the  difference,  we  mighf  mention 

that  by  comparison  with  tl ■•■an  off  central  California,  the  aquarium 

water  averages  a  few  degrees  warmer,  is  less  well  buffered,  and  contains 
far  more  excretory  products.  In  addition,  the  aquarium  tanks  nave  metal 
drain  pipes,  which  might  induce  a  minor  amount  of  electrolysis.  Also,  the 
pins  were  only  on  striped  bass  in  the  aquarium  tests  and  only  on  other 
species  in  field  tests. 

As  for  the  relative  effects  of  different  species  of  fishes  on  corrosion 
in  general,  we  can  state  that  nickel  pins  showed  serious  corrosion  when 
used  on  such  unrelated  forms  as  sharks,  sturgeon,  salmon,  striped  bass, 
and  flatfishes. 

Nickel 
Nickel  has  been  used  widely  in  tagging  marine  fishes.  Its  short- 
comings have  apparently  not  been  generally  appreciated.  In  aquarium 
experiments  begun  in  1049.  20  of  the  nickel  pins  then  in  use  in  California 


TABLE   1 
Chemical    Composition   of    Nickel    Pins   and    Nickel    Wire1 


Nickel  wire 


Nickel  pins 

(Soft,  for  use  on 

flatfish) 


Nickel  pins 

(Medium  hard,  for 

use  on  salmon) 


Nickel. 

Manganese.. 

Copper 

Iron 

Cobalt 

Titanium 

Magnesium.. 
Molybdenum 

Silicon 

Aluminum 

Chromium  .  _ 


99.05% 
.30%  to 
.03%  to 
.03%  to 
.03%  to 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 


3% 

0.30% 
0.30% 
0.30% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 


99.11% 
.30%  to 
.03%  to 
.03%  to 
.03%  to 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 


3% 

0.30% 
0.30% 
0.30% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 


99.19% 
.30%  to 
less  than 
.03%  to 
.03%  to 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 
less  than 


3% 
.03% 
0.30% 
0.30% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 
.03% 


1  Analysis  by  Abbot  A.  Haules,  Inc.,  San  Francisco.  Elements  other  than  nickel  were  determined  spectro- 
graphically. 


306  I   \l.ll-'"k\|.\    PISH    AM)  GAME 

were  tested  with  plastic  Petersen  i.\  pe  disks  on  striped  bass,  as  previously 
described.  The  diameter  of  these  pins  was  n.ii.",-_>  inch.  Their  chemical 
composition  is  given  in  Table  1.  Ten  pins  of  each  of  the  two  types  shown 
in  the  table  were  used.  These  tags  were  placed  beneath  either  t lie  first  or 
second  dorsal  fin.  At  the  end  of  seven  months,  the  fish  were  removed  for 
careful  examination  of  the  various  kinds  of  wire  which  were  being  tested. 
Nineteen  of  the  20  tags  in  which  the  nickel  pins  had  been  used  had  fallen 
off  as  a  dired  resull  of  pin  corrosion.  The  single  remaining  one  was  so 
badly  corroded  that  the  tag  was  on  the  verge  of  falling  off.  Typical  ex- 
amples  of  these  corroded  pins  are  shown  in  Figure  143,  A  to  E.  There 
was  a  peculiar  hollowing  oui  of  manj  pins,  leaving  only  atissue-thin  shell 
of  metal  for  pari  of  their  Length.  This  hollowing  was  the  most  common 
type  of  corrosion  encountered  in  nickel  pins  in  both  field  and  aquarium. 
A  fair  proportion  of  those  corroded  in  this  manner  were  mirror  bright 
ob  the  mi  it  side  and  showed  no  external  break  that  could  be  detected  with 
the  oaked  eye.  Mos1  such  pins  were  discovered  by  bending  the  wire — the 
hollow  ones  broke.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  nickel  wire  which  had  not 

I n  formed  into  pins  showed  no  such  behavior. 

At  the  time  that  these  experiments  were  started,  the  Bureau  of 
Marine  Fisheries  was  getting  returns  from  fair  numbers  of  ocean-tagged 
salmon  and  assorted  species  of  bottom  fishes.  Disk  tags  and  nickel  pins 
had  been  used  exclusively.  The  returned  pins  were  classified  as  un- 
corroded,  corroded  but  not  seriously  weakened,  or  seriously  weakened  by 
corrosion.  Tarnish  was  not  classified  as  corrosion.  The  record  of  158 
salmon  tag  pins  is  shown  in  Table  2  and  75  pins  from  nine  species  of 
bottom  fish  are  recorded  in  Table  3.  Some  bottom  fish  returns  were  out 
over  400  days  and  some  salmon  returns  were  out  over  700  clays. 


Figure  143.      (opposite  page) 

A.  Nickel  pin,  0.032  inch  (0.81  mm.)  diameter,  field  test.  Note  the  longitudinal 
crack,  under  which  the  pin  was  hollow.  Such  cracks  are  difficult  or  impossible 
to  see  with  the  naked  eye.  This  pin  was  on  a  green  sturgeon  (Acipenser 
medirostris)  for  198  days. 

B.  Nickel  pin,  0.032  inch  (0.81  mm.)  diameter,  field  test,  after  151  days  on  a  king 
salmon  (Oncorhynchus  tshawytscha).  The  shaft  has  hollowed  near  the  head 
of  the  pin. 

C.  Nickel  pin,  0.032  inch  (0.81  mm.)  diameter,  field  test,  returned  from  an  English 
sole  (Parophrys  vetulus)  after  273  days.  This  pin  is  hollow  near  the  tip,  and 
a  thread  was  passed  through  the  nearly  detached  piece  at  the  end  to  demon- 
strate its  hollowness. 

D.  Nickel  pin,  0.032  inch  (0.81  mm.)  diameter,  field  test,  showing  surface  cor- 
rosion. This  pin  was  on  a  king  salmon  for  492  days. 

E.  Nickel  pin,  0.032  inch  (0.81  mm.)  diameter,  aquarium  test,  showing  hollow- 
ing at  both  ends.  It  was  hollow  for  5/ie  inch  at  the  tip.  It  was  placed  on  a  flatfish 
in  the  aquarium  and  found  on  the  tank  bottom  2  32  days  later.  Though  in  the 
aquarium,  this  fish  was  not  used  in  the  regular  series  of  tests  outlined  in  the 
text. 

F.  Nickel  wire,  0.036  inch  (0.91  mm.)  diameter,  field  test,  returned  after  205  days 
on  a  29-inch  striped  bass  (Roccus  saxatilis).  Note  the  surface  corrosion.  Unlike 
the  pins,  the  wire  did  not  become  hollow. 

G.  Hard  silver  wire,  0.036  inch  (0.91  mm.)  diameter,  field  test,  showing  an  in- 
cipient break  resulting  from  repeated  bending.  Similar  "necks"  in  two  returned 
wires  broke  in  handling  before  they  could  be  photographed.  The  one  shown 
was  prepared  by  flexing  a  piece  of  the  silver  wire.  One  wire  reached  this  condi- 
tion after  132  days  on  a  22-inch  striped  bass  in  the  field. 

H.  Monel  wire,  0.036  inch  (0.91  mm.)  diameter,  field  test,  showing  a  pitting  type 
of  corrosion.  Note  that  the  tip  has  corroded  through  and  dropped  off.  This  tag 
was  returned  after  228  days  on  a  striped  bass. 
I.  Monel  wire,  0.036  inch  (0.91  mm.)  diameter,  aquarium  test,  after  about  seven 
months  on  a  striped  bass.  Note. the  shredding  type  of  corrosion.  All  tags  in 
this  test  involving  Monel  had  fallen  off  within  232  days  from  corrosion,  and 
were  collected  from  the  tank  bottom.  Photograph  by  D.  H.  Fry,  Jr. 


DETERIORATION    AND   CORROSION   IN   DISK   FISH   TAGS  307 


- 


I    \!  IR'RXIA   FISH   AND   GAME 


There  appears  to  be  no  demonstrable  difTerenee  between  species.  Of 
the  pins  which  had  been  <>ut  more  than  200  days,  corrosion  had  affected 
34  percenl  of  those  od  salmon  and  32  percent  of  the  ones  on  bottom 
fishes. 

TABLE   2 

Corrosion   of   Nickel    Pins   on    Salmon 


1  >:i\  -  out 

0-99 

100-199 

200-499 

500-799 

Total 

42 

0 
0 

56 

1 
3 

22 

2 
8 

15 

3 
6 

135 

roded  but  not  seriously  weak- 

6 

Number  seriously  weakened  by  corrosion  .. 

17 

42 
0 

60 
6.7 

32 
31 

24 
37.5 

158 

Also  of  interest  was  the  tendency  of  the  incidence  of  corrosion 
among  returned  pins  to  level  off  (at  something  over  30  percent),  rather 
than  to  continue  increasing  indefinitely.  One  plausible  explanation  is  as 
follows.  Suppose  that  the  pins  remain  uncorroded  for  a  period  which 
varies  greatly  but  is  always  over  100  days,  and  that  each  day  thereafter 
a  small  number  starts  to  corrode.  The  number  of  corroded  pins  will  then 
increase  as  time  passes,  but  eventally  the  corroded  pins  will  start  break- 
ing. If  the  number  breaking  each  day  is  the  same  as  the  number  starting 
to  coiinde.  there  will  be  no  further  increase  in  the  number  of  corroded 
but  unbroken)  pins. 

Nickel  wire  0.036  inch  in  diameter  cut  into  lengths  and  knotted  at 
both  ends  has  also  been  used  in  a  preliminary  way  on  striped  bass  in 
California.  This  material  was  tested  in  the  same  aquarium  experiment 
with  the  nickel  pins  described  above  and  stood  up  a  great  deal  better. 
None  of  the  nine  wires  tested  showed  any  evidence  of  corrosion  after 
seven  months.  Even  after  19  months,  the  four  which  remained  on  fish 
appeared  as  good  as  new ;  nor  had  the  other  five  which  had  been  removed 
along  the  way  been  corroded.  Differences  in  the  chemical  composition  of 
the  pins  and  the  wire  were  at  first  believed  responsible  for  the  apparent 
discrepancy.  However,  this  was  ruled  out  when  a  chemical  analysis,  out- 
lined in  Table  1,  revealed  no  differences  of  any  consequence.  Location  of 
all  the  wires  on  the  caudal  peduncle,  and  all  the  pins  further  forward 
on  the  back  of  the  fish,  where  they  passed  through  more  tissue,  may  have 
had  something  to  do  with  it,  although  this  seems  improbable.  Further 
confusion  arises  from  the  fact  that  badly  corroded  tag  wires  cut  from  this 
same  coil  have  been  returned  from  wild  striped  bass  after  less  than  a  year. 
An  example  is  shown  in  Figure  143F.  This  latter  fact,  coupled  with  the 
behavior  of  the  nickel  pins,  already  discussed,  is  proof  enough  of  the 
general  unsuitability  of  this  metal  for  salt-water  tagging.  Work  with  it 
has  accordingly  been  discontinued,  despite  the  many  intriguing  ques- 
tions which  remain  unanswered. 


DETERIORATION   AXD   CORROSION*   IN  DISK  FISH   TAGS  309 

Monel 

On  the  basis  of  information  provided  by  the  International  Nickel 
Company,  Monel  metal  appeared  to  be  a  promising  material  for  use  with 
Petersen  disks  on  salt-water  fish.  A  representative  of  this  company  rec- 
ommended it  highly  in  1!'4S.  lie  was  convinced  of  its  superiority  over 
nickel  for  our  purposes.  The  success  experienced  with  Monel  strap  tags 
on  halibut  (Thompson  and  Sherrington,  1930)  supported  his  conviction. 
Accordingly,  this  material  was  tried  in  a  preliminary  field  test  with  sev- 
eral hundred  striped  bass  in  1948.  Soft-temper  Monel  metal  wire.  0.036 
inch  in  diameter,  was  used.  A  parallel  aquarium  test  was  carried  on 
with  20  fish  of  the  same  species  in  a  salt  water  tank  at  Steinhart  Aqua- 
rium. All  20  of  the  wires  used  in  this  latter  experiment  had  corroded 
sufficiently  to  cause  loss  of  the  tags  after  only  six  months.  A  photograph 
of  a  typical  wire  is  shown  in  Figure  1431. 

This  experimenl  was  subsequently  repeated  with  another  20  Monel 
wires,  using  K)  from  the  same  coil  and  1<>  Prom  a  differenl  hatch  of  metal. 
The  results  were  essentially  the  same.  None  of  the  tags  stayed  on  longer 
than  seven  months,  and  corrosion  was  responsible  for  their  loss.  More 
over,  Monel  metal  strap  tags  placed  on  the  opercles  of  eight  of  these  same 
fish  also  corroded  rapidly. 

These  developments  were  baffling  in  view  of  the  success  experienced 
by  the  Intei-national  Fisheries  Commission,  already  mentioned.  Differ- 
ences in  environmental  conditions,  in  the  fish  themselves,  or  in  the  alloys 
used  could  explain  tic  discrepancy. 

At  first  it  was  believed  that  some  peculiar  electrolytic  or  chemical 
condition  in  the  aquarium  had  produced  a  greatly  increased  rate  of  cor- 
rosion of  the  Monel  metal  wires  over  that  which  would  have  occurred  in 
the  ocean.  However,  the  subsequent  return  of  one  of  these  same  wires 
corroded  almost  to  the  breaking  point  after  exactly  one  year  on  a  wild 
striped  bass  suggested  that  essentially  the  same  thing  was  happening  in 
the  ocean  where  it  would,  of  course,  be  somewhat  retarded,  since  in  Cali- 
fornia these  fish  ordinarily  move  into  fresh  water  during  the  winter-.  A 
photograph  of  a  corroded  Monel  metal  wire  after  228  days  on  a  wild 
striped  bass  is  shown  in  Figure  143H.  It  is  now  obvious,  on  the  basis  of 
the  aquarium  experiments  and  additional  corroded  returns  from  wild 
fish,  that  Monel  metal  is  also  unsuitable  for  use  in  tagging  salt-water 
fishes.  Much  better  materials  are  available  for  the  purpose. 

Silver 

Silver  was  turned  to  as  one  of  the  possibilities  worth  investigating 
after  nickel  and  Monel  metal  were  found  wanting.  Several  hundred 
striped  bass  were  tagged  with  disk  tags  and  cold-rolled  silver  wire  (0.03fi 
inch  in  diameter)  in  a  preliminary  field  test  in  1950.  A  sizable  number 
has  already  been  returned,  none  corroded.  However,  this  metal  has 
proved  to  be  unsuitable,  because  of  its  physical  characters.  The  con- 
tinual working  which  it  undergoes  on  a  strong  and  active  fish,  such  as  a 
striped  bass,  soon  produces  a  sharply  localized  hour-glass  type  of  attentu- 
ation.  Returned  wires  have  characteristically  shown  this,  and  have  fre- 
quently been  on  the  point  of  breaking  after  being  out  less  than  nine 
months.  It  is  readily  possible  to  reproduce  this  in  a  piece  of  silver  wire 
by  working  it  a  few  times  with  the  fingers.  This  was  done  to  produce  the 


310 


I    \l.ll  m|;\  |  \     PISH     A\l»    G  \  ME 


z 

a 

-c 

'- 

•  - 

- 

/ 

- 

CO 

- 

5 

~                 —   "I   CI          -i 

- 

— 

IN      i 

: 

A    -     - 

C( 

CI 

Ci 

1 

O 

o 

CI 

1' 

31 

—           CI 

- 

-   - 

- 

- 

— 
- 

— 

- 

lO      i 

~  i 

08 

r. 
o 

" 

- 

None   

Corroded  but  not  seriously  weakened 

Seriously  weakened  by  corrosion 

None 

Corroded  but  not  seriously  weakened 
Seriously  weakened  by  corrosion 

None . 

Corroded  but  not  seriously  weakened 
Seriously  weakened  l>v  coirosion 

None  -    

Corroded  but  not  Beriously  weakened. 

Seriously  weakened  by  corrosion 

None    . 

Corroded  but  not  seriously  weakened 

Seriously  weakened  by  corrosion 

None 

Corroded  but   not  seriously  weakened 

Seriously  weakened  by  oorrosion 

None 

Corroded  but   not  seriously  weakened 
Seriously  weakened  by  corrosion 

None    

Corroded  but   not  seriously  weakened 
Seriously  weakened  by  corrosion.  . 

t 

-' 
S 
'■- 

0 

a 
r. 

JS  I 

DO    £ 

—  -5 
.2   =. 

■3  g 

=  a 

i  ^ 

8 

i  I 

o  I 

do  a 

t  I 

>   6 

i  8, 

£■4 

| 

1   © 

jc 

8  J 

Z    -z 
DC   "§ 

~  3 

0   £ 

mft, 

TC    B 

1 1 

>■•"? 
?.  5 

So, 

1  « 
!  C 

j  >s 

=: 

!<* 
a 

5 
_    : 

-■    B, 

2  2 
-  5 

i     « 

—     ~- 

■-  s 

-    ■* 

=    ? 

S 

;  g 

1  "5 
: 

a  1 
t  ~ 

■-  z 
m  •; 

*     j 

s  - 

DETERIORATION'   AXD   CORROSION    IN    DISK    FISH   TAGS 


311 


-.  ?<  -       s 


•*  00  "* 


- 

- 

- 

4> 

c 

a 

1   - 

. 

-*  a 

Jj  e 

a  o 

«  : 

« -5 

°  -z 

*    : 

s   | 

;  >>  t 

>>  i: 

"B   ° 

r    - 

=  : 

o   >, 

:   > 

. 

1  'C  — 

C  - 

-  _, 

7- 

1  ^>   *> 

-    z 

■  «    ri 

—      3 

1 

3    ; 

i 

-    5 

_^       ; 

-  i 

. 

:.  — 

~  — 

9 
C 

■a  » 

, 

o  b  S 

Z  _  2 

2  -   - 

c 

o 

o 

14 

S4 

o 

u 

>> 

a 

- 

M 

C 

I    o 
=   ; 
z  ■§ 

"3 

■a 
s 
c 

5 

o 

L    5 

X 

'I 

© 

r    t 

■B 

a 

: 

o 

X 

- 

Z    S 

_c 

H 

a 

C    5 

IS 

© 

-    i. 

CO 

a 

:.    - 

u 

C   E 

o 

o 

- 

- 

) 

r- 

p 

J-  3 
=  -3 
s3  - 

^  - 

-    - 


E   2 


312  I   \l.l|-(H:\  l  \    PISH     \  NT)  GAME 

example  shown  in  Figure  143G  which  is  essentially  similar  in  appearance 
to  many  of  those  actually  returned  from  fish. 

Silver  is  clearly  nol  tin*  answer  to  the  problem  and  testing  lias  been 
discontinued. 

Stainless  Steel 

This  w;is  another  of  the  metals  given  serious  consideration  when 
nickel  ami  Monel  metal  proved  unsatisfactory.  It  appeared  promising 
in  the  light  of  information  supplied  by  Scandinavian  fisheries  workers.1 
although  local  metallurgists  who  were  consulted  feared  that,  being  an 
alloy,  ii  mighl  behave  in  the  same  way  as  Monel  metal. 

A.ctive  testing  of  stainless  steel  is  now  under  way.  Results  to  date  are 
highly  promising,  bu1  it  is  still  too  early  for  final  conclusions. 

Ten  stainless  steel  w  ires,  type  302,2  diameter  0.032  inch,  were  tested 
on  striped  bass  in  a  -alt-water  aquarium  tank.  None  showed  evidence 
of  corrosion  after  seven  months.  Alter  13  months,  three  of  the  10  tags 
remained  in  place,  and  the  wires  showed  no  evidence  of  corrosion. 
The  actual  record  is  better  than  this  might  indicate,  for  three  tags  had 
been  removed  for  examination,  three  were  shed  or  lost  through  the  death 
of  the  fish,  and  one  was  lost  when  a  plastic  disk  (Vinylite)  cracked  and 
fell  off.  None  of  these  seven  showed  any  signs  of  corrosion.  After  19 
months  the  two  remaining  wires  similarly  were  imcorroded.  All  of  these 
stainless  steel  wires  were  located  on  the  caudal  peduncle.  It  will  be 
recalled  that  this  was  also  the  case  with  the  nickel  wires  which  failed  to 
corrode. 

In  a  second  aquarium  experiment,  still  in  progress,  the  same  type 
and  diameter  stainless  steel  wire  from  another  source  was  tested  in  a 
similar  manner.  After  nine  months.  II  of  the  original  12  were  still  in 
place,  and  a  careful  examination  revealed  no  evidence  of  corrosion.  How- 
ever,  there  was  characteristically  about  one-fourth  inch  of  slack.  These 
tags  were  all  located  beneath  either  the  first  or  second  dorsal. 

It  is  also  too  early  for  final  conclusions  from  field  tests  on  stainless 
steel  in  California,  but  the  available  evidence  is  favorable.  Examination 
of  a  small  number  of  returns  of  type  302  stainless  steel  wires  from  salmon 
and  striped  bass  has  revealed  no  corrosion,  but  none  had  been  out  more 
than  eight  months. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  Cable  (1950)  reports  success  with 
stainless  steel  rivets  and  plastic  disks  on  shad  (Alosa). 

Stainless  steel  wire  has  certain  physical  characteristics  which  are 
distinct  disadvantages: 

It  is  difficult  to  twist  properly  when  locking  the  second  tag  disk 
in  place.  Even  "dead  soft"  wire  refuses  to  twist  into  a  neat,  compact 
"knot."  To  a  person  casually  handling  such  wire,  it  seems  much  more 
flexible  than  (for  example)  our  nickel  pins,  but  the  nickel  will  readily 
twist  into  a  short  radius  curve  and  make  a  compact  knot.  The  stainless 
steel  will  not,  and  efforts  to  make  it  do  so  are  apt  to  injure  the  fish.  The 
diameter  of  the  wire  has  a  great  influence  on  this  lack  of  short  radius 
flexibility.  Some  o.O.'iii-jnch-diameter  wire  proved  to  be  entirely  useless 

1  The  information  was  obtained  bv  correspondence  with  Messrs.  Einar  Lea,  Bergen, 
Norway,  and  Ph.  Wolf,  Malmo,  Sweden. 

2  Composition  of  type  302  stainless  steel,  as  denned  by  the  American  Iron  and  Steel 
Institute,  is  as  follows:  carbon  0.08-0.20  percent,  manganese  2.0  percent  maximum, 
silicon  1.0  percent  maximum,  phosphorus  0.0  1  percent  maximum,  sulphur  0.03  percent 
maximum,  chrominum  17.0-19.0  percent,  nickel  8.0-10.0  percent,  remainder  "iron." 


DETERIORATION  AXD   CORROSION  IX  DISK  FISH  TAGS  313 

for  tagging.  The  0.032-inch  wire  of  the  same  temper  was  much  better 
and  has  been  used  for  all  of  our  aquarium  and  field  work. 

A  second  difficulty  has  to  do  with  the  tags  developing  slack  while 
on  the  fish.  This  appears  to  be  partly  due  to  the  wire  working  its  way 
through  the  flesh  of  the  fish  and  partly  to  the  tag  disks  pulling  a  little 
extra  slack  out  of  the  loose  knots  described  in  the  preceding  paragraph. 
In  our  aquarium  experiments,  stainless  steel  tags  had  an  average  of 
a  little  over  one-fourth  inch  of  slack  after  nine  months.  At  best,  Petersen 
disk  tags  are  overly  susceptible  to  catching  in  nets  and  a  slack  tag  with 
a  poor  knot  is  worse  than  average. 

Stainless  steel  pins  should  be  an  improvement  over  wire  in  that 
they  would  have  a  knot  on  one  end  only.  We  have  contacted  1 7  pin  manu- 
facturers to  date  and  none  was  willing  to  make  pins  ou1  of  this  material. 

One  final  inconvenience  of  stainless  steel  is  quickly  discovered  by 
every  tagger.  When  lids  wire  is  cut  with  a  pair  of  pliers,  it  takes  on  a 
razor-sharp  tip  that  will  slice  into  any  flesh  it  touches. 

Tantalum 

Tantalum  is  a  comparatively  rare  metal.  We  have  not  yet  had  time 
to  test  it  thoroughly,  but  to  date  the  only  apparent  disadvantage  is  its 
cost  (about  1")  cents  for  a  wire  0.032  inch  by  three  inches — enough  for 
one  tag). 

This  metal  is  used  in  human  surgery  because  it  is  chemically  inert, 
does  not  corrode,  and  is  nontoxic.  Tantalum  wire  possesses  about  the  righl 
dcuTi f  stiffness  l<M'  t .- 1 -_: ■_•  i 1 1 l: .  and  ii  is  easy  to  twist  into  a  good  knot. 

There  was  no  evidence  of  corrosion  on  any  of  15  t  ant  alum  wires  used 
with  disk  tags  on  striped  bass  in  Steinharl  Aquarium.  These  tags  had 
been  in  place  for  nine  months  when  last  examined.  There  seems  to  be 
little  tendency  for  tantalum  wires  to  develop  slack. 

It  was  reported  to  as  thai  in  human  surgery  flesh  will  attach  to 
tantalum.  A  careful  check  was  made  in  the  aquarium  tests  to  note  it'  the 
fish  flesh  attached  in  the  wires.  In  no  instance  was  there  any  indication 
that  this  was  happening  with  tantalum  or  any  other  metal. 

Field  tests  with  tantalum  have  been  very  limited.  The  few  returns 
we  have  examined  show  no  corrosion. 

Plastics 
A  fairly  intensive  search  has  failed  to  uncover  any  nonmetallic 
filaments  promising  enough  to  warrant  testing  with  Petersen  disks.  Fiber- 
glass cuts  itself  when  knotted  and  subjected  to  continual  working.  A  great 
variety  of  plastic  monofilaments  which  have  been  examined  are  unsuit- 
able because  they  cannot  be  knotted  satisfactorily  in  the  required  diam- 
eter. However,  the  search  is  being  continued. 

SUMMARY 

Failure  of  the  plastic  materials  used  for  Petersen-type  disk  tags 
by  the  California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game  has  presented  serious  prob- 
lems. Cellulose  nitrate  has  been  the  most  satisfactory,  although  it  has 
tended  to  become  brittle  after  prolonged  storage.  Thin  cellulose  acetate 
disks  (0.030  inch)  seemed  satisfactory  on  flatfish,  but  have  failed  badly 
on  salmon;  thicker  ones  (0.015  inch)  have  stood  up  fairly  well.  Vinyl- 
ite  disks  have  been  unduly  brittle  and  subject  to  cracking. 


314  «  A 1. 1 FoKNIA    PISH    AND  GAME 

Corrosion  of  metal  wires  used  with  these  disks  has  been  an  even 
more  serious  problem.  Nickel  and  Monel  metal  have  proved  entirely  un- 
satisfactory because  of  their  rapid  corrosion  on  salt-water  fish.  Silver 

been  unsatisfactory  because  the  wire  soon  broke.  Stainless  steel  and 
tantalum  are  both  highly  promising  on  the  basis  of  preliminary  observa- 
tions, and  they  are  currently  being  tested  further. 

REFERENCES 
Cable,  Louella  B. 

1950.     A  cheek  tag  for  marking  fish,  with  semi-automatic  pliers  for  application  of 
tag.  Cons.  Per.  hit  it.  Explor.  Mer,  Journ.  du  Cons.,  rol.  16,  no.  2,  p.  185-191. 
Merriman,  I  >a  trie] 

1941.     Studies  on  the  striped  bass   I  Roccus  saxatilis)   of  the  Atlantic  Coast.  U.  S. 
Fish  and  Wildlife  Service,  Fisherj    Bulletin,  vol.  50,  no.  .'J.',  p.  1-77. 
Thompson,  William  F.  and  William  ('.  Herrington 

1930.     Life  his  tor  j  of  the  Pacific  halibut.   (1)   Marking  experiments.  International 
Fisheries  Comm.,  Rept.  no.  2,  137  p. 


THE  RELATIVE  ABUNDANCE  OF  SHARKS  AND 
BAT  STINGRAYS  IN  SAN  FRANCISCO  BAY1 

j:.v    1  ■'.  \i:i    S.   I  [EBALD 

Steinhart  Aquarium.  California  Academy  of  Sciences,  San  Francisco 

and  \V\j.  Ij  i  rs  Ripley 

Bureau  of  Marine  Fisheries,  California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game 

Through  the  studies  of  the  California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game 
as  well  as  the  catch  records  of  the  annual  Coyote  Point  shark  derbies, 
much  information  has  accumulated  on  the  shark  and  ba1  stingray  popu- 
lations in  the  central  and  sunt  linn  portions  of  San  Francisco  Bay.  These 
data,  presented  herein,  should  be  considered  as  a  preliminary  working 
basis  for  future  population  studies  in  the  Bay  area.  Most  valuable  was 
the  information  obtained  from  the  catches  of  the  Fourth  Annual  Coyote 
Point  Shark  Derby  held  on  Sunday,  September  17.  1950.  The  shark  derby 
is  an  event  held  annually  since  1!»47  and  sponsored  jointly  by  the  San 
Mateo  Lions  Club  and  the  Coyote  Point  Yacht  Club.  Through  these 
sponsoring  organizations  many  prizes  are  offered  each  year  by  local 
business  men.  The  awards  are  made  for  a  wide  variety  of  catches  such 
as  the  largest  sharks,  smallesl  shark,  largest  stingrays,  with  special 
awards  for  the  best  father  and  sun  team,  best  fisherwoman,  best  fishergirl, 
etc.  This  has  stimulated  a  greal  amount  of  interest  as  indicated  by  the 
large  number  of  fishermen  registered  for  the  yearly  derbies.  During  the 
1950  derby  all  of  the  fishermen  obtained  their  catches  within  the  area 
bounded  by  Hunter  Point  on  the  north,  the  east  side  of  the  channel  in 
the  center  of  the  bay,  and  the  shell  mounds  about  one  mile  south  of  San 
Mateo  Bridge  (Figure  144).  The  majority  of  the  boats  fished  within 
one  and  one-half  miles  of  Coyote  Point.  There  were  no  boats  fishing  on 
the  east  side  of  the  bay  although  there  are  good  shark  fishing  localities 
within  that  area. 

The  1,406  fishermen  registered  with  the  1950  derby  officials  turned 
in  a  total  of  926  sharks  and  89  bat  stingray  s  (total  weight  4,216  pounds).2 
This  count  was  made  by  the  senior  author  and  Mr.  Donald  Simpson  at 
the  Royal  Tallow  and  Soap  Company  on  the  morning  after  the  derby.  It 
is  known  that  a  number  of  sharks  and  bat  stingrays  were  not  turned  in 
and  hence  not  counted,  but  we  have  no  way  of  estimating  the  exact 
number.  Two  rarities  were  among  the  catches,  i.e.,  a  thresher  shark  and 
a  sixgill  shark. 

The  catch  data  for  each  species  taken  during  the  1950  shark  derby 
(September  17)  are  presented  in  Table  1  together  with  a  comparison 
of  the  June,  1948,  derby  catches  as  well  as  those  made  by  the  Division 
of  Fish  and  Game  during  October  and  November  of  1943.  Data  on  the 


1  Submitted  for  publication  December,  1950. 

2  Weight  does  not  include  35  soupfin  removed  from  contestants'  boats  which  are 
included  in  the  total  count.  Soupfin  are  protected  in  California  and  may  be  caught  only 
in  areas  in  which  the  depth  is  25  fathoms  or  greater;  specific  gear  is  required.  Soupfin 
may  not  be  caught  in  San  Francisco  Bay. 

(315) 


316 


CALIPORN  l  \    PISH    ami  G  \Mi: 


SAN  PABLO 


kMcNeor  Pt 


SousolitoO) 


<p- 


0^ 


,1^ 


0* 


& 


p*p 


SAN 
FRANCISCO 


i*W°' 


»e< 


p^ 


c*   OSon  Moteo 


mo'55  — -"' 


Figure  144.     Map  of  San  Francisco  Bay  showing  fishing  areas 


SHARKS  AND  BAT   STINGRAYS  IN   SAN  FRANCISCO   BAY 


317 


NCH0O*OO 

00 

00 

00  00  o  to  to  o  o 

OS 

oo 

a 

iO  N 

OS 

lO 

as 

OJ 

,fi 

:- 

tu 

-0 

1- 

1 

OKOO0COO 

o 

to 

03 
-3 
CO- 

00(0000300 

d 

■tf 

oo 

T    -T 

o 

os 

1-1 

-^ 

M 

3 

ss!  o  n  oo  o  o 

o 

o 

03 

r-  DC  re  cc  — '  O  O 

d 

co 

M 

03 

CO 
OS 

"3 
o 

i-    fH   -m 

o 

3 

<u 

OJ 

o 

5  >. 

T3    ° 

03 

NHOIHOOO 

oo  co  —  -*  N  o  o 

- 

o 

IN 

3    it 

-r  —  CO 

3a 

-  8 

_     3 

—     - 

3 

i=,  i 

O 
/ 

93    3 

g  CO 

o 

>> 

r-etoonooo 

o 

tN 

r. 

00  >c z   z  z 

— 

"5 

i  — 

o 

- 

_ 

2 

JrlUJC     »HH 

L0 

CO   tC             -     '" 

-1  / 

•-     "I 

~ 

© 

O 

•  - 

o. 

X 

15 

k< 

ai 

T3 

^ 

—  t-    -    Z   ?l    3    3 

M  tC 

os 

S 

.-   i-                i-h 

IN 

(N 

/ 

00 
-r 
r. 

St 

c.  -r  t- — f  o  o  O 

O  IN 

Ol 

3 

-  i-  -  -  ^ 

os  to 

'* 

03 

—  -N  -r 

os 

o 

O 

CO 

^ 

ei 

9) 

OS 

0 

a 

oi" 

3 

>> 

oi 
« 

— i  o  t~  to  to  o  o 

O  00 

oo 

_  o 

to  oo  co  us  ro 

r-  IN 

~ 

-a  S 

SO  i-l  •* 

co 

co 

C  _aj 

<-*" 

~ 

_e    S3 

3 

O 
CO 

is,  fe 

-     3 

•3    - 

£to 

>> 

si 

m 

00  -#  O  00  O  O  O 

o  ■* 

•# 

0 

oo  os  co 

in  co 

»o 

?ts 

■* 

to 

CO 

"3 

O 

J2 

O 

+3      1 

m  -tf      1 

03      i 

>>  03      i 

.fi      . 

03  -Q      i 
i-            i 

"V      1 

3  T3 

-a    1    !    !    1   !    1 

3 
oi      1 

i  §  i 

.2 
*5 
o 
o, 

CO 

C      i      i      i      i      i      i 
3      I      i      i      i      i      i 
O      i      i      i      J      i 

J    ! 

in     i 
*t      i 
*■«   en 

ige  of  bat 
tal    shark 
ay  catch.. 

moot  hi 

shark 

1  shark 
lark.. 

OS       1 

■  g 
"=1  ti 

2  >> 

—    rt 

CQ     L4 
SO 

3s 

Brown  s 
Leopard 
Dogfish. 
Soupfin . 
Sevengil 
Sixgill  si 
Threshe: 

"o  .5 

H      QQ 

53 

pq 

o   t0 

Percent: 
in    to 
stingr 

318 


'    \l.lln|;\|  \    PISH    AND   QA  Ml 


CO     co 


<=    O 


■-    I. 


""*"   C»3  CC  ^<   ^  GN  Ci 


—  — ioooorooooo'j< 


—  -r    —   O-^CMOOi-hOW 


oooooooooooo 


-*©-*ocoo©ocoo 


0   J3 

►J 


1  c    § 

2  °  § 


HMCicc^H^rjaoHin 


■-'.-i.-iOCCONMOOi-O 
-  -  "  ?1  Cl  -  ^  [>  N  M  «  O 

"HHMflHiijNNNfliO 


HHHrtHW 


SHARKS  AND  BAT  STINGRAYS  IN   SAN  FRANCISCO  BAY 


319 


w      CO 


t     Z 


:  o 


JS 

M  00  !C  O  »  -<  O  iO  Li  M 

» 

c3   o 

?i  —  t^  in  r — r  r.  K  O  n 

CO 

<N                 —          i-l          rtrfCfl 

co 

o   co 

i_4      L, 

a   » 

-s  a 

Eh 

0001"000—  O  -h 

CD 

O 

c2 

.a 

GO 

ONhioonOMh- 

•# 

>. 

<N 

& 

S    M 

-  s 

7 

—    -    71    -    -    ~    ~    ~    "I    — 

f- 

a^: 

(3    - 

J  — 

J     ' 

_^ 

/. 

c 

r: 

o 

OC~lC-rCrcr-r--i 

C 

n 

iO 

tfi 

0, 

3 

O 

go 

?l  ifi    Tl    r    S  NMOOtDO 

>o 

"5 

d         NHMNtOtW* 

- 
— 

CC 

M 

0 

Q 

O  i"f  ?:  -  i-  -  "i  s  *■ 

<* 

— 

1^                CO                        — 

>* 

C3     _ 

'" 

a  a 

:  £ 

.    i 

- 

O  t»  U5  o  -r  o  re  —   c    / 

t~ 

0  jjs-tf 

M       ■*  tS  eo  cd  tN  •.;  u:  r< 

co 

o 

111 

t-  -  o 

COOOCinOOOC 
C   <t    C    C   '"    TJ   C    O    ri  — 

>-o 

00 

o  o  r-  oc  r-  so  m  ci-  ©_ 

(•- 

0    - 

co"  tt  i-."  oo"  tN  e  i  re  —  ■ "   r. 

0    C 

—                                 r-C           —           ej 

o 

«i 

O  «n  l-  o  C  i-  •"  '"  tc  re 

co 

!■« 

WNWNrt^HeqtHcc 

CD 

CM 

g| 

§«a 

©nook:  -.ooooo 

CN 

>-0  co  cN  -r  t~  r-  n  -r  m  x 

00 

■M  -3 

ir5>-iCN-«<lNtNCN^rO)00 

co 

O    O 

co" 

O    a 

w  = 

d 

0 

d 

gq 

(c^ieesoi-io^ioo 

"3 
o 
H 

HH-irtt»NClc>INCI 

320 


<  AXJFORNIA    FISH    AND   GAME 


1948  derbj  catches  were  taken  by  the  junior  author.  In  addition,  the  1943 
shark  studies  were  under  his  direction. 

The  L943  fishing  was  divided  bet  wren  two  separate  areas  in  the  bay 
the  shaded  portions  of  Figure  144i.  tin-  southernmost  of  which  corre- 
sponds approximately  to  thai  area  fished  during  the  annual  shark  der- 
bies.  Since  the  1943  fishing  was  carried  out  during  October  and  Novem- 
ber and  thai  of  the  1('~>ii  derby  during  September,  these  data  are  more 
comparable  than  thai  of  the  June,  1948,  derby. 

To  compare  accurately  the  relative  abundance  of  the  sharks  of  the 
northern  pari  of  the  bay  with  those  of  the  southern  section,  all  data  from 
the  1943  survey  were  summarized.  Only  those  data  which  were  com- 
parable  (sel  line-caught  sharks)  were  considered,  sharks  not  included 
in  the  calculations  were  those  taken  by  trammel  net  (Station  1,  south 
bay  and  by  hand  lines  |  Station  6,  south  bay,  and  Station  2,  north  bay), 
as  well  as  those  taken  by  one  set  Line  with  inadequate  data  (Station  17, 
north  h;i.\  .  Prom  Tables  2  and  3  it  will  he  noted  that  the  total  set  of 
hooks  per  station  ranged  between  110  and  880.  These  tables  also 
presenl  other  essential  data,  i.e..  fishing  time  and  resultant  catch  by  spe- 
eies.  Total  hook  minutes  were  obtained  for  each  set  of  gear  by  multiplying 
the  time  fished  by  the  number  of  hooks  used.  Combining  the  records  for 
all  stations,  the  number  of  hook  minutes  was  divided  into  the  number  of 
sharks  caught.  Division  by  60  and  multiplication  by  100  resulted  in  a 
figure  giving  the  average  number  of  sharks  taken  per  100  hook-hours  of 
fishing  time.  This  same  method  was  applied  to  obtain  the  catch  by  species 
per  100  hook-hours.  The  data  are  presented  in  Table  4. 

TABLE  4 

Number   of   Sharks   Caught    Per   100    Hook-Hours   of   Fishing   Time 
San    Francisco    Bay:    October- November,   1943 


Species 

North  Bay 

South  Bay 

Species 

North  Bay 

South  Bay 

Brown  Smoothhound   - 

27.31 
6.35 

1.76 

37.55 

8.49 

27.41 

0.35 

3.24 

Leopard  Shark 

0.41 

All  sharks  combined 

35.78 

77.10 

From  this  table  the  brown  smoothhounds  are  found  to  be  the  most 
abundant  species  in  both  sections  of  the  bay.  In  the  northern  section  the 
order  of  abundance  is  brown  smoothhound,  leopard  shark,  dogfish,  and 
soupfin.  In  the  southern  section  it  is  brown  smoothhound,  dogfish,  leopard 
shark,  soupfin  and  sevengill  shark.  There  were  none  of  the  latter  species 
in  the  northern  section.  Table  4  also  demonstrates  that  the  south  bay  is 
more  than  twice  as  productive  as  the  north  bay  in  terms  of  all  sharks 
caught  (77.10  sharks  per  100  hook  hours  as  compared  with  35.78). 

To  compare  all  of  the  data  from  the  various  shark  derbies  with  that 
of  the  1943  survey,  it  was  necessary  to  use  a  percentage  treatment  as  the 
methods  of  fishing  were  too  varied  to  permit  application  of  a  standard- 
ized unit  of  effort.  Discussion  of  the  south  bay  Fish  and  Game  catches 
(1943),  as  compared  with  the  1948  and  1950  shark  derbies,  will  be  made 
under  the  individual  species.  It  is  cautioned  that  sharp  fluctuations  in 
abundance  for  any  species  from  one  series  of  data  to  the  next  may  result 
in  a  percentage  difference  in  other  species,  as  previously  indicated,  which 


SHARKS   AXD  BAT   STINGRAYS  IX   SAX   FRAXCISCO  BAY  321 

will  be  more  apparent  than  real.  For  example,  the  drop  in  the  percentage 
catch  of  dogfish  between  1943  and  1950  (from  31.9  to  0.5  percent)  would 
necessarily  cause  the  difference  between  these  two  figures  to  be  reflected 
as  an  apparent  but  not  real  increase  in  other  species  of  the  1950  catch. 

BROWN    SMOOTHHOUND,    TRIAKIS   HENLEI 

Table  1  indicates  ;i  genera]  agreement  in  the  percentage  catch  of 
brown  smoothhounds,  i.e.,  48.2  percent  of  the  south  bay  shark  catch  in 
1!)43.  4::.!i  percent  in  194*  and  58  percenl  in  1950. 

Based  on  an  examination  of  stomach  contents,  the  brown  smooth- 
hound  appears  to  feed  in  the  bay  by  preference  upon  small  crabs  and 
shrimp.  In  the  Aquarium  brown  smoothhounds  musl  he  handled  with  care 
for  they  are  usually  difficuH  to  keep  in  good  health.  At  aighl  a  lighted 
bulb  must  always  he  in  place  over  the  tank,  otherwise  the  smoothhounds 
bnmp  into  the  side  walls  SO  often  that  within  one  or  two  weeks  the  noses 
are  badly  abraded  and  death  results.  Gravid  females  will  occasionally 
drop  their  young  in  the  aquarium  tanks. 

LEOPARD   SHARK,    TRIAKIS   SEMIFASCIATA 

Data  on  the  percentage  catches  for  this  species  are  rather  erratic 
although  the  northern  and  southern  areas  are  in  agreement  i  15.2  versus 
13.1  percent  for  1943  i.  In  1948  the  percentage  catch  jumped  to  46.3  per- 
cent and  in  1950  dropped  to  28.2  percent. 

The  leopard  is  one  of  Calif  ornia 's  toughesl  sharks.  It  can  be  kept  ou1 
of  water  for  a  considerable  time  and  will  revive  when  again  placed  in 
water.  It  lives  for  severa]  years  in  the  Aquarium  and  adapts  itself  readily 

to  any  ty] f  food.  Males  have  been  recorded  as  reaching  a  maximum 

length  of ::  feet  Roedel  and  Ripley,  1950,  p.  51  .  Anion-  the  shark  derby 
catches  were  two  males  of  approximately  4.1  feet. 

DOGFISH,   SQUALUS   ACANTHIAS 

In  the  southern  section  of  the  hay  the  dogfish  is  usually  the  second 
most  abundant  shark.  Consequently,  the  scarcity  of  specimens  in  the 
catch  of  the  1950  shark  derby  was  a  source  of  considerable  interest.  Only 
five  dogfish  were  taken,  four  adults  and  one  juvenile.  The  senior  author 
helped  to  weigh  the  sharks  taken  during  the  1949  derby,  and  although 
no  count  was  made  at  that  time,  it  is  estimated  that  there  were  at  least 
35  or  4H  of  this  species.  The  1943  (October-November)  figures  indicate 
that  the  dogfish  furnished  31.9  percent  of  the  sharks  caught  in  the  south- 
ern part  of  the  bay.  Yet  in  September.  1950,  the  same  area  yielded  only 
one-half  percent  of  this  species  in  the  total  catch. 

Foerster  (1942)  has  reported  the  preliminary  results  of  dogfish 
tagging  in  the  British  Columbia  area.  During  1941,  564  dogfish  were 
tagged  in  four  different  groups.  From  these  releases  there  were  34  recov- 
eries. Although  the  returns  indicated  much  movement  during  the  period 
of  freedom,  it  was  not  possible  to  demonstrate  a  migration  pattern. 
There  are  three  records  of  tagged  dogfish  moving  from  Washington  to 
Oregon  and  California  for  a  maximum  distance  of  760  miles  during  a 
period  of  6  to  18  months  (Bonham  et  al.,  1949,  p.  92).  According  to  Bige- 
low  and  Schroeder  (1948,  p.  455)  the  same  species  of  dogfish  occurs  on 


322  CALIFORNIA    l  [SB    A.\l>  GAME 

tin'  Atlantic  Coast.  In  thai  area  there  is  no1  only  much  variation  in  sea- 
sonal  abundance,  bu1  also  a  good  deal  of  sudden  and  erratic  local  move- 
lii'  nt  from  locality  to  locality.  Thus  it  seems  thai  there  is  ;i  probability 
thai  the  Pacific  Coasl  dogfish  population  may  fluctuate  in  a  manner  simi- 
lar to  thai  of  the  population  on  the  Atlantic  Coast.  Such  might  explain 
the  absence  of  dogfish  from  the  1950  derby  catches. 

One  other  possible  factor  in  the  disappearance  of  the  dogfish  from 
the  southern  end  oi  the  bay  should  be  discussed.  Beginning  about  1945 
there  was  an  extensive  trawl  fi-sherv  tor  dogfish  developed  in  Northern 
California  waters  during  the  months  of  ( October  through  January.  It  is 
possible  thai  this  concentrated  fishing  effort  might  have  reduced  the  dog- 
fish br Istock  population. 

In  an  effort  to  check  on  the  significance  of  the  absence  of  dogfish  from 
the  derby  catches,  the  senior  writer  visited  the  Hunter  Point  Shrimp 
Company  on  September  28,  29,  and  30,  which  was  11  to  13  days  after 
the  derby.  The  nets  operated  by  this  company  fish  on  the  bottom 
from  fixed  positions  about  two  miles  south  of  Treasure  Island.  During 
the  three  days  there  were  61  sharks  caught,  including  30  dogfish,  20 
brown  smoothhounds,  one  leopard  and  one  thresher.  This  was  not  as 
many  as  would  normally  be  expected;  but,  as  pointed  out  by  the  fisher- 
men, the  presence  of  considerable  seaweed  drives  fishes  and  sharks  away 
from  the  nets.  These  inadequate  catch  figures  show  that  dogfish  composed 
about  49.2  percent  of  the  shark  catch.  Since  these  data  were  not  obtained 
at  the  same  time  as  the  shark  derby,  their  significance  is  somewhat  de- 
creased. However  it  does  seem  that  the  absence  of  dogfish  from  the  1950 
catches  could  most  probably  have  been  caused  by  one  of  the  sudden 
erratic  local  movements  described  bv  Bigelow  and  Schroeder  (1948, 
p.  460). 

We  have  not  been  too  successful  in  keeping  dogfish  in  the  Aquarium 
for  any  extended  period  of  time.  Without  a  nightlight  over  the  tank  this 
species,  like  the  brown  smoothhound,  quickly  wears  off  its  nose  on  the 
walls.  Mr.  W.  E.  Sullivan  of  the  Depoe  Bay  Aquarium  (Oregon)  advises 
us  that  they  are  able  to  keep  dogfish  alive  for  a  maximum  time  of  about 
one  month.  At  Steinhart  Aquarium  we  have  had  one  clutch  of  four  young 
which  were  dropped  by  a  102-cm.  (40-inch)  female  (October  15,  1950). 
The  young  survived  only  about  two  days  and  the  pangs  of  sharkbirth 
were  apparently  too  much  for  the  mother  as  four  days  later  she  died. 

The  dogfish  is  an  extremely  wide-ranging  species,  occurring  not  only 
on  both  sides  of  the  North  Pacific  but  also  on  both  sides  of  the  North 
Atlantic. 

SOUPFIN    SHARK,   GALEORHINUS   ZYOPTERUS 

Despite  the  restriction  on  the  taking  of  soupfin  shark,  at  least  60 
were  caught  at  the  derby.  The  senior  author  counted  14.  The  junior 
author  tagged  and  released  11  that  had  been  caught  by  contestants. 
Warden  E.  M.  McLaurin,  aboard  the  patrol  boat  "Minnow,"  recovered 
35  dead  soupfin  from  other  fishing  boats.  This  is  a  total  of  60  which  is 
considerably  in  excess  of  the  approximate  dozen  specimens  observed  by 
the  senior  author  during  the  1949  derby.  This  small  increase  may  be  due 
in  part  to  the  legal  protection  which  has  been  given  to  the  soupfin  as  well 


SHARKS   AND   BAT   STINGRAYS   IX   SAX   FRANCISCO    BAY 


323 


C      ; 


CO     U. 


I-   - 


-d 

3011 

1 

XI.  g 

i£ 

a 

5 

S-3 

a  c 

3 

0 

1 
c 

c 

0 

2  0 

d 

3 

c 

1 

d 

> 

T3     CO     g 

Jd 

G 

d 
1= 

lound 

Reef, 

uver. 

Co- 

■SSd 

gBQc 

.•si 

l",    mi.    off 
San   Marcus 
Creek,  Enci- 
nitas,  Calif. 

c 

S  i-a  0 

EJ3^' 

I"3 

in  Bajo 

Va  urn 

British 
lumbia 

Solana  E 

near 

Diego  5 
depth 

—  >; 

SE       c 
Queen  ( 
lotte  Si 
British 
lumbia 

J3 

a   ; 

2 

- 

= 

-a 
>> 

J" 

Tl 

- 

> 

J: 

, 

XI 

, 

, 

z 

o 

-= 

.3 

.= 

r?    O 

0 

O 

1 

<s 

fi    i 

a 

0 

~ 

0 

0 
= 

0  S 

< 

=  T3 
S   £ 

£5 

■sj-a 

=  a 

•0  s 

■g-g 

a 

"" 

OS 

OS 

t^ 

^ 

-g 

•a 

-" 

Jg      B 

j9 

ji 

- 

a.  5 

I5J3 

0      m 

0 

2. 

0 
= 

£ 

— 

-*'  § 

z*      0 

a; 

T3 

a 

■a 

"' 

P5 

-r 

IM 

«M 

rf 

OS 

Os 

OS 

OS 

~     = 

T3 
OS 

a  > 
-  1 

OS 

OS 

OS 

OS 

~ 

US 

-~t 

T) 

1  ■ 

2. 

>, 

bb 

>. 

tsC 

OO 

3 

< 

V. 

3 

3 
< 

-  -3 

?5 

16  mi.  S.  of 
Ventura, 

Calif. 

10    mi.    NW 
San    Martin 
M   ,    Baja 
Calif. 

5mi.S.ol  Pt. 

Mugu,  Calif. 
tthoma 

Off      Malibu 
Pt,  Calif.  53 

fathoms 

=  /- 

Soott     Van- 
couver    Id., 
British    Co- 
lumbia 

>~ 

•&  3 

a  g 

i   S 

-c 

ja 

._  = 

c  3 

.S3 

.23 

-3 

-  - 

—  x  g 

—  '3 

—  '  = 

fc. 

£ 

E-" 

•M  a 

=  > 

a  s 

=  = 

—  3 

-r_--£ 

E  „-5| 

0  a 

<5  " 

---- 

3  *W 

i=-'- 

5=3c 

Ofe 

S~5 

-: 

J 

►j 

_; 

S 

>-< 

bli  at 

H 

E-i 

H 

H 

H 

1 

.= 

_c 

.3 

s 

2  ■ 

—  — . 

.3 

cc 

•0 

00 

csE-i 

to 

g 

*n 

v> 

CO 

~~ 

10 

'3 

O 

J2 

0 

?3 

"a 

73 

£ 

J2 

£ 

"3 

1 

e 

"a 

£ 

*s 

8 

£ 

bo  .2 

£§ 

<M 

00 

n 

re 

TT 

< 

00 

OO 

00 

a! 

re 

OS 

OS 

O" 

OS 

r-. 
00 

OS 

r 

CO 

OS 

— 

OS 

- 

ca 

w 

»fl 

J>> 

_• 

>> 

09 

>> 

>> 

OS 

si 

< 

3 
•-a 

8 

s 

1 

s 

32  I  CALIFORNIA    PISH    AND  i; AMI 

as  to  the  almost  complete  cessal  ion  of  commercial  fishing  activities  during 
1950.  The  soupfin  has  been  twofold  curse*  1  by  the  possession  of  a  delicious 
dorsal  fin  ;is  well  as  a  vitamin-rich  liver. 

Fishermen  report  thai  before  the  war  large  numbers  of  both  sexes 
of  soupfin  were  presenl  in  I  he  bay.  I  n  t  he  early  part  of  the  war  the  bay 
was  dose, I  to  set  line  fishing  thus  providing  some  protection.  However  in 
adjacenl  localities  many  soupfin  were  caught,  resulting  in  an  over-all 
reduction  in  abundance.  The  studies  made  by  the  junior  author  (1946) 
have  shown  that  the  females  move  into  the  bay  to  drop  their  young. 
Whether  these  brood  females  are  resident  in  the  San  Francisco  region  is 
not  known.  The  junior  author  has  also  shown  that  the  soupfin  population 
in  Northern  California  is  composed  mostly  of  males,  in  Southern  Cali- 
fornia mostly  of  females  and  in  Central  California  of  an  approximate 
50  ."ill  ratio.  With  this  peculiar  distributional  pattern  there  must  be 
considerable  migration.  There  have  been  118  soupfin  tagged  in  the  State 
by  interested  California  fishermen  as  well  as  by  the  Division  of  Fish  and 
I  iame.  From  these  tagged  soupfin  there  have  been  only  four  returns,  the 
data  for  which  appear  in  Table  5.  Number  8753  is  probably  the  most 
interesting  record,  for  this  female  traveled  about  95  miles  southward  in 
the  short  time  of  four  days.  Another  female,  No.  8749,  was  tagged  five 
days  later  and  30  miles  northward  of  the  point  where  8753  was  tagged. 
Despite  this  short  time  and  distance  separating  the  tagging  areas,  No. 
8749  traveled  in  the  opposite  direction,  i.e.,  northward  for  approximately 
1,100  miles  to  Hecate  Strait,  British  Columbia,  during  a  period  of  3^ 
months.  Number  A-3272  (female)  was  tagged  15  miles  north  of  8749  and 
also  migrated  northward  for  more  than  1,000  miles  to  the  vicinity  of 
Vancouver,  British  Columbia,  during  the  next  2|  years;  this  specimen 
has  been  previously  reported  by  Ripley  (1946b).  Number  8728  (male) 
moved  about  190  miles  northward  during  5h  months  of  freedom  between 
tagging  and  recapture.  The  five-pound  salmon  in  the  stomach  of  this 
specimen  is  noteworthy  since  it  is  only  rarely  that  salmon  are  taken  in 
the  San  Diego  area. 

Westrheim  (1950)  reported  18  soupfin  tagged  by  Oregon  fishermen 
during  1948  and  291  during  1949.  Of  the  1949  group  85  were  tagged  in 
the  area  between  Point  Conception  and  Eureka.  There  were  two  recov- 
eries during  1949  (Table  5).  A  male  tagged  at  Point  Sur  moved  about  90 
miles  northward  during  2|  months  of  freedom  and  grew  four  inches  in 
length  during  that  time.  Another  male,  tagged  near  Cape  Scott,  Van- 
couver Island,  British  Columbia,  traveled  75  miles  eastward  during  two 
days  of  freedom. 

No  conclusions  can  be  drawn  from  this  small  amount  of  data.  How- 
ever, it  is  of  interest  to  note  that  two  of  the  three  females  migrated  for 
more  than  1,000  miles  and  that  the  third  female  averaged  about  27-| 
miles  per  day  for  four  days.  One  male  moved  a  total  of  190  miles  in  5| 
months.  Another  male  moved  90  miles  in  2|  months  and  the  third  male, 
75  miles  in  two  days. 

For  the  1950  derby  the  Division  of  Fish  and  Game  prepared  a 
mimeographed  sheet  for  distribution  to  all  fishermen.  This  paper  pre- 
sented graphically  the  principal  characters  used  to  distinguish  the  vari- 
ous species  of  sharks,  including  the  soupfin.  In  all  press  releases  by  the 
sponsoring  organizations  the  restrictions  on  the  taking  of  soupfin  were 


SHARKS  AND  BAT  STINGRAYS  IN  SAN  FRANCISCO  BAY  325 

fully  discussed.  Despite  these  precautions  the  60  specimens  mentioned 
above  were  caught  and  most  of  them  not  released. 

Several  attempts  have  been  made  to  bring  living  soupfin  to  the 
Aquarium  but  all  have  met  with  failure.  Consequently  we  have  no  knowl- 
edge of  the  manner  in  which  this  species  acts  in  captivit  \ . 

SEVENGILL   SHARK,   NOTORYNCHUS   MACULATUM 

The  59  sevengill sharks  caughl  during  the  derby  represenl  an  appar- 
ent 2\  percenl  increase  over  the  1943  records.  In  this  latter  year  36  speci- 
mens were  caught  of  which  25  were  females  and  11  were  males.  However, 
of  the  33  specimens  sexed  at  the  1950  derby  the  reverse  was  true,  for  22 
were  males  and  1 1  were  females. 

Internal  examinations  were  made  on  37  specimens.  Only  three  fish 
had  food  in  the  stomach  other  than  bait.  <  >ne  fish  contained  four  separate 
pieces  of  sardine  bait.  None  of  the  fish  was  sexually  mature.  A  lii  j  pound 
male  had  a  gonad  which  weighed  only  4..">  grams  whereas  a  female  of  "20 \ 
pounds  had  an  equally  small  gonad  of  5.2  grams.  It  is  often  possible  to 
explain  the  marked  predominance  of  one  sex  in  a  given  population  on 
the  basis  of  migration  and  movements  connected  with  sexual  maturity 
and  reproduction.  However,  such  explanation  will  not  clarify  the  ap- 
parent reversal  in  the  numbers  of  each  sex  shown  by  comparison  between 
the  1943  and  1950  catches.  We  are  a1  a  loss  to  explain  this  reversal  excepl 
by  i  he  smallness  of  the  sample. 

Ill  all  of  the  foil!-  shark  derbies  held  to  dale  the  largesl  Sharks  caught 

have  been  sevens-ills.  In  order  of  size  they  have  I n  36  pounds  i  1948  . 

34  pounds  <  1949),  30  pounds  i  L947  i  and  27|  pounds  i  1950).  The  1943 
Pish  and  Game  records  list  three  specimens  larger  than  this.  i.e..  one  shark 
of  42  pounds,  another  of  50  pounds  and  the  largest.  KXi'  pounds.  It  is 
probable  that  the  majority  of  sevengills  leave  the  bay  by  the  time  they 
have  attained  a  weight  of  50  pounds  i  Figure  1  4~>   . 


1 

1               1               1 

1                 1                 1                 1                 1                 1 

1              1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

■ 

IOO 

~ 

90 

MALES        • 

- 

eo 

FEMALES  o 

- 

70 

- 

a 

5    60 
O 

50 

Z 

° 

1-    40 

, 

• 

*    50 

• 

20 

o 

- 

10 

°5 

|o. 

8 

•  •"*  * 

1            1            1            1            1            1 

1              1 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

- 

i 

60 

70             80            90 

100           110          120          IJO           140          150 

160            170 

180 

190 

200 

210 

220 

1 

LENGTH         IN       CENTIMETERS 

Figure  145.     Length-weight  graph  for   61  young  sevengill  sharks  caught  in 
San  Francisco  Bay 


326  I   \ui'"i;\i  \    FISH    \\h  i,  \  mi: 

sii this  species  is  ovoviviparous,  bearing  its  young  alive,  it  is 

interesting  to  speculate  as  to  the  manner  in  which  the  young  arrive  in  the 
bay.  I  >"  I  he  aduh  femali  s  enter  the  baj  and  drop  their  young,  or  are  they 
dropped  outside  of  the  bay  and  subsequently  carried  in  by  the  currents 
as  well  as  by  the  juveniles'  own  swimming  ability  .' 

Although  we  bave  no  knowledge  of  the  occurrence  within  the  bay 
of  the  large  adull  sevengills  (maximum  Length  15  fleet),  nevertheless 
there  is  evidence  of  the  presence  of  Large  shark-like  animals  in  the  area. 
On  November  1 .  1943,  the  junior  author  made  a  set  of  162  hooks  between 
Alcatraz  and  Treasure  Islands.  Each  end  of  the  set  was  weighted  with  a 
25-pound  anchor  and  one  end  carried  a  buoy  line.  During  this  operation 
vine  Large  fishlike  organism  cu1  the  gear  in  half  and  dragged  the  remain- 
der out  towards  the  Golden  Gate  where  it  was  lost.  Since  a  submarine 
net  was  in  operation  at  the  time,  the  probability  of  this  having  been 
caused  by  a  whale  or  blackfish  is  limited  as  animals  of  this  diameter  would 
noi  have  been  able  to  penetrate  the  net  and,  in  any  event,  they  do  not  take 
bait.  The  writers  hold  the  unproved  conviction  that  the  culprit  might  have 
been  a  large  sevengill  shark. 

A  swimming  sevengill  shark  is  a  beautiful  sight  to  behold,  and  in  the 
Aquarium  it  never  seems  to  stop  swimming.  Day  or  night,  the  sevengill 
is  usually  on  the  move.  This  swimming  habit  is  undoubtedly  correlated 
with  the  fact  that  the  adults  are  open-water  sharks  not  limited  to  inshore 
coastal  areas.  A  young  sevengill  shark  caught  September  17,  1950,  lived 
in  the  Aquarium  until  January  17,  1951,  when  it  died  as  the  result  of  an 
accident.  During  these  four  months  the  shark  was  never  observed  to  resl 
on  the  bottom,  and  it  never  learned  to  feed  itself  in  captivity.  It  was 
force-fed  usually  three  times  a  week  being  given  one-half  a  sardine  or 
the  equivalent  at  each  feeding. 

In  the  bay  there  seems  to  be  an  indication  that  the  sevengill  prefers 
the  deeper  water.  At  the  1950  derby  many  catches  of  brown  smooth- 
hounds,  leopard  sharks  and  bat  stingrays  were  made  in  water  of  8  to  15 
feet  depth.  However,  most  of  the  sevengills  came  from  water  deeper  than 
20  feet.  The  preferred  area  near  Coyote  Point  seemed  to  be  the  section 
along  the  edge  of  the  dropoff  into  the  deeper  portions  of  the  main  channel. 
During  the  1943  Fish  and  Game  survey  the  best  catches  of  sevengill 
sharks  were  made  in  an  area  about  two  miles  southeast  of  Hunter  Point 
at  a  depth  of  30  to  35  feet.  During  6|  hours  of  fishing  (10.15  a.m.  to  4.45 
p.m.)  three  persons  using  five  handlines  and  sardine  bait  caught  605 
pounds  of  sevengill  sharks  (17  males  and  21  females)  including  one 
female  of  106|  pounds.  In  addition  there  were  caught  216  pounds  of 
leopards  and  136  pounds  of  brown  smoothhounds. 

A  sevengill  shark  just  pulled  out  of  the  water  is  a  nasty  fish  to 
handle.  Tn  a  small  boat  it  is  often  imperative  to  kill  it  immediately,  for 
otherwise  the  belligerent  disposition  of  the  shark  as  well  as  its  tendency 
to  use  its  jaws  and  sharp  teeth  on  anything  in  the  vicinity  makes  it  a 
dangerous  liability.  Recently  an  Aquarium  staff  member  was  force-feed- 
ing the  small  sevengill  shark  previously  mentioned,  and  being  accus- 
tomed to  shoving  sardines  down  the  throats  of  other  types  of  sharks  with 
his  fingers,  he  applied  the  same  method  to  the  sevengill.  "When  he  finished 
the  feeding,  he  was  surprised  to  find  a  deep  and  subsequently  painful 
gash  on  one  of  his  fingers.  Needless  to  say,  this  technique  has  now  been 
modified. 


SHARKS  AND  BAT   STINGRAYS    IN    SAN    FRANCIS*  0   BAY 


327 


Since  little  information  is  available  on  sevengill  sharks,  there  are 
presented  in  Figure  145  the  weight-length  data  for  61  of  the  specimens 
examined. 

SIXGILL   SHARK,   HEXANCHUS   GRISEUS 

One  of  the  two  rarities  taken  during  the  derby  fishing  was  a  young 
female sixgill  shark  with  a  weighl  of  20^  pounds  and  a  length  of  1290  mm. 
(50|  inches).  It  was  caughl  by  Mr.  .lack  Morris  of  San  Francisco  at  a 
location  in  the  channel  one-half  way  between  Eunter  Point  and  Coyote 
Point.  The  catch  was  made  in  35  feel  of  water  with  sardine  bait.  There 
is  a  single  published  record  for  San  Francisco  Bay;  Evermann  (1929, 
p.  348)  listed  "two  fishes  {Hexanchus  corinus)  from  Sausalito,  Califor- 
nia. "'  These  were  caughl  a1  Peterson  ">  Boa1  I  [ouse  on  July  14.  1928,  and 
presented  to  the  Academy  by  the  fisherman  (Cat.  Xo.  21*3  .  <>n  March 
19,  l!)4o,  Mr.  Donald  Simpson.  Aquatic  ( iollector  for  Steinharl  Aquarium, 
caughl  a  670  nun.  (26|  inches  male  sixgill  shark  at  the  intake  of  the 
Pacific  Gas  and  Electric  plant  in  San  Francisco  (CAS  Cat.  No.  11615 
To  our  knowledge  the  Largest  shark  ever  caughl  in  San  Francisco  Bay 
was  a  Mil  pound  sixgill.  This  ll-foo1  specimen  was  taken  during  July, 
1928,  by  Mr.  K.  C.  Pell  of  San  Francisco     Figure  146).  The  catch  was 


Figure   146.     The  largest  shark  known  from  San  Francisco  Bav — a  sixgill  caught  near 
Sausalito  by  Mr.  R.  C.  Pell,  July,  1928  <  11  feet  and  464  pounds) 

made  at  Yellow  Bluff  which  is  about  one-half  mile  inside  of  Golden  Gate 
Bridge  near  Sausalito. 

The  recorded  range  on  the  Pacific  Coast  for  the  sixgill  shark  is  from 
northern  British  Columbia  to  Southern  California  ( Roedel  and  Ripley, 
1950,  p.  40).  In  addition  to  the  Pacific  Coast  the  sixgill  shark  has  an 
extremely  wide  range,  being  known  from  both  sides  of  the  Atlantic,  the 
Mediterranean  and  South  Africa  as  well  as  from  Chile,  Japan,  Australia 


4—41374 


328  CALIFORNIA    FISH    AND   GAME 

and  the  southern  [ndian  Ocean.  The  mos1  complete  discussion  of  the 
species  is  to  be  Eound  in  Bigelow  and  Schroeder  (1948,  p.  80).  These 
authors  give  the  maximum  length  of  the  sixgill  shark  as  26  Heel  with  most 
large  a  lults  attaining  a  maximum  length  no  greater  Than  15J  feet. 

THRESHER   SHARK,   ALOPIAS   VULPINUS 

The  in"--'  spectacular  catch  of  the  1950  derby  was  a  young  male 

thresher  shark  weighing  6|  pounds  and  measuring  1168  mm.  total  length 

16  inches  .  This  shark  was  caught  on  sardine  bail  at  a  depth  of  18  feet 

near  the  channel  marker  off  Coyote  Poinl  by  Mr.  Raymond  Farmer  of 

K.mIu I  City.  Mr.  Parmer  tells  of  the  thresher's  rolling  in  the  water 

several  times  after  being  hooked,  in  The  same  manner  as  is  characteristic 
of  some  nt'  The  large  striped  bass.  This  specimen  is  now  cataloged  in  the 
California  Academy  of  Sciences  [chthyological  Collections,  Xo.  20438. 

While  visiting  Hunter  Point  Shrimp  Company  docks  on  September 
30,  1950,  the  senior  writer  was  surprised  to  find  a  37-pound  female 
thresher  shark  among  The  few  sharks  taken  on  ThaT  day.  This  was  The  first 
shark  of  This  kind  which  The  fishermen  had  semi.  The  total  length  of  the 
specimen  was  1935  mm.  (76A  inches)  with  the  length  to  the  notch  in  front 
of  lie-  Tail  898  mm.  (35|  inches  i.  The  stomach  was  crammed  with  18 
anchovies,  and  the  ovaries  were  flattened  showing  no  sign  of  maturity 
(144.5  grams  .  This  specimen  is  now  cataloged  as  ('As  \<>.  20453. 

There  is  a  record  of  two  threshers  taken  during  1947  in  salmon  gill 
nets  fishing  off  McNear's  Point  in  San  Pablo  Bay  (Roedel  and  Ripley, 
plod.  p.  47  i.  These  ••very  long-tailed  specimens"  were  taken  by  a  char- 
1'  red  boat  doing  salmon  tagging.  The  biologist  in  charge  was  not  familiar 
with  the  local  sharks  but  did  observe  the  long  tails,  which  were  later 
i  i it  off  by  the  fishermen.  Bigelow  and  Schroeder  (1948,  p.  168)  report 
two  small  specimens  from  San  Francisco  in  the  collections  of  the  Museum 
of  Comparative  Zoology.  There  is  no  information  as  to  whether  these 
were  taken  in  the  bay  or  were  brought  To  San  Francisco  by  boats  fishing 
in  other  areas. 

In  California  the  thresher  shark  is  not  uncommon  south  of  Santa 
Cruz;  however,  north  of  Santa  Cruz  very  few  are  taken. 

"We  have  never  had  a  thresher  shark  in  The  Aquarium  so  cannot 
report  on  its  behavior  in  captivity.  The  thresher's  long  tail  and  fast 
swimming  ability  might  pose  serious  problems  if  the  shark  were  kept 
in  a  restricted  area. 

BAT   STiNGRAY,    HOLORHINUS   CALIFORNICUS 

This  large  stingray  is  reported  to  attain  a  weight  of  150  pounds 
(Roedel  and  Ripley,  1950.  p.  78).  Those  which  have  been  taken  at  Tin- 
shark  derbies  have  weighed  considerably  less  than  this  maximum  weight. 
In  1948.  1949  and  1950  the  largest  bat  stingrays  caught  weighed  40,  58 
and  45  pounds  respectively.  The  species  ranges  along  the  Pacific  Coast 
from  Oregon  to  Magdalena  Bay.  Baja  California.  It  occurs  most  com- 
monly in  shallow  bays  and  sloughs. 

The  handling  of  large  bat  stingrays  out  of  water  is  often  a  problem. 
If  the  specimen  is  not  to  be  saved,  then  the  quick  removal  of  the  tail 
including  the  dangerous  spine  is  sufficient.  However,  if  The  bat  stingray 
is  to  be  used  for  exhibition  in  an  aquarium,  one  needs  two  sturdy  hands 


SHARKS  AND  BAT   STINGRAYS    IX    SAN    FRANCISCO  BAY  329 

and  a  pair  of  pliers.  Two  fingers  of  one  hand  are  inserted,  one  in  each 
spiracle;  using  the  pliers  in  the  other  hand  the  tail  is  carefully  seized 
;ii  the  spine,  and  the  bat  ray  is  carried  to  the  nearest  tank  of  water. 
Large  bat  rays  of  30  or  more  pounds  are  usually  sluggish  in  the  Aquarium 
and  oft. 'i i  do  not  readily  learn  to  avoid  the  sides  of  the  tank.  The  resultanl 
abrasion  of  the  pectoral  wing  tips  has  caused  the  eventual  death  of  some 
specimens.  Y^ung  bat  rays  of  20  pounds  and  less  seem  to  adapl  them- 
selves to  tanks  and  various  foods  withoul  difficulty. 

As  indicated  in  Table  1  tin-  89  hat  stingrays  caughl  during  the  1950 
derby  represented  a  considerable  increase  proportionally  over  the  28 
caught  in  the  same  area  during  tin-  1943  fishing.  In  the  fishing  area 
north  of  Treasure  Island  the  percentage  of  ba1  stingrays  in  the  total  hat 
stingray  and  shark  catch  was  intermediate  between  the  1943  and  1948 
south  h;iv  catches,  i.e..  5.2  versus  8.0  percenl  1950  and  2.0  percent 
1943).  ' 

Most  of  the  ba1  stingray's  tails  from  the  1950  derby  were  removed 
by  Air.  Marvin  Kolber,  instructor  ;it  San  Mateo  Junior  College,  for  the 
study  by  Dr.  Bruce  Halstead  I  1950)  of  the  function  of  the  spine  and 
poison  gland.  This  activity  created  much  wild  eyed  speculation  among 
the  many  visitors  at  the  derby  ;is  to  the  reasons  for  this  procedure. 

REFERENCES 

Bigelow,  Henry  I'...  and  William  C.  Schroeder 

1948.  Fishes  of  the  western  north  Atlantic.  Chap  3.  Sharks.  Sears  Found.  Marine 
Res.,  Memoir  1.  pt.  1.  \>.  59-546,  lot   ti^s. 

Bonham,  Kelshaw,  and  others. 

L949.  Biological  .-owl  vitamin  A  studies  of  dogfish  landed  in  the  state  of  Washington 
(Squalus  suckleyi).  Washington  Dept.  Fish.,  Biological  Kept.  19A,  p.  83 
111.  II  figs. 

Evermann,  Barton  Warren 

L929.  Report  of  the  director  <>i"  the  museum  for  the  year  L928.  Calif.  Acad.  ScL, 
Proc,  vol.  17.  4ili  ser.,  p.  308  360. 

Foerster,  R.  B. 

L942.     Dogfish    tagging — preliminary   results.   Canada.    Fisheries    Res.    Bd.    Pacific 
t  loasl  Sta.,  Progress  Rept.  no.  53,  p.  L2  1-".. 
Halstead,  Bruce  W.,  ami  F.  Rene  Modglin 

1950.  A  preliminary  reporl  "n  the  venom  apparatus  of  the  bat-raj  Holorhinus 
califomicus.  Copeia,  no.  '.'>.  p.  165-175,  6" 

Ripley,  Wm.  Ellis 

1946a.  The  soupfin  shark  and  the  fishery.  Calif.  Div.  Fish  ami  Game,  Fish   Bull. 

64,  p.  7  37.  18  figs.,  1--'  tables. 
1946b.  Recovery  of  a  tagged  soupfin  shark.  Calif.  Fish  ami  Game,  vol.  32,  no.  2,  p. 
101-102. 
Roedel,  Phil  M.,  and  Win.  Ellis  Ripley 

1950.     California  sharks  ami  rays.  Calif.  Div.  Fish  ami  Came.  Fish  Bull.  7."i.  88  p., 
65  figs. 
Westrheim,  Sigurd  J. 

1950.  The  1949  soupfin  shark  fishery  of  Oregon.  Oregon  Fish  Comra.,  Research 
Briefs,  vol.  3.  no.  1.  p.  39-49,  3  figs..  4  tables. 


RESULTS  OF  THE  PISMO  CLAM  CENSUSES, 
1948,  1949,  AND  1950' 

Bj     ROBl  IM     I  ».    <  '"I  LI  ER 

Bureau  <>\  Marine  Fisheries,  California  Division  "f  Pish  and  Game 

Since  1925,  the  Bureau  of  Marine  Fisheries  has  made  a  census  of 
the  Pismo  clam  (Tivela  stultorum)  population  in  the  Pismo  Beach  area 
during  the  period  of  lowesl  tides  cadi  November.  This  report  covers  the 
censuses  conducted  in   1948,   L949,  ami    1950. 

A  trench  or  section  is  dug  across  the  beach  from  the  high  tide  mark 
as  far  out  as  it  is  possible  to  collect  the  clams.  The  section,  standard  each 
year,  is  6  inches  wide  and  8|  inches  deep.  For  most  of  the  length  of  the 
section,  the  sand  is  thrown  to  the  side  in  such  a  manner  as  to  spread  it 
out  in  a  thin  Layer.  As  Long  as  the  beach  is  just  wet,  and  there  is  not  too 
much  water,  this  system  works  perfectly.  Even  the  smallest  clams  are 
easily  seen.  When  the  trench  reaches  the  point  where  too  much  surf 
prevents  spreading  of  the  sand,  it  is  then  passed  through  a  screen  of 
one-fourth-inch  mesh.  Eventually,  too  much  water  forces  abandoning 
the  screen,  fro  iM  I  In  'ii  on  p  roh  in  g  is  done,  which  turns  out  only  the  Larger 
chims.  former  studies  have  shown  that  over  90  pen-cut  of  the  young 
clams  are  found  in  the  intertidal  zone,  which  is  more  than  covered  by 
the  throwing  and  screening  methods.  Thus  only  a  vci-y  few  of  the  clams 
would  be  missed  in  a  section. 

The  locations  of  the  sections  are:  I  1  i  Pismo — one-eighth  mile  north 
of  Pismo  Pier,  (2)  Oceano  1  ,',,  miles  south  of  Pismo  Pier,  (3)  Le 
Grande — one  mile  south  of  the  north  boundary  of  the  old  clam  refuge, 
(4)  Morro — nine-tenths  mile  north  of  Morro  Rock,  (5)  Cayucos — eight- 
tenths  mile  south  of  the  Standard  Oil  Pier. 

The  first  three  sections  are  on  Pismo  Peach  proper.  The  Oceano 
section  is  in  a  new  dam  refuge  which  was  closed  to  digging  by  act  of  the 
Fish  and  Game  Commission  onNovember5,  1949.  The  Le  Grande  section 
is  in  the  old  refuge  which  was  closed  from  1929  to  1949.  The  Pismo 
Section  has  always  been  open  to  clamming. 

The  two  remaining  sections  lie  to  the  north  of  Pismo  Beach  in  an 
area  between  .Morro  Pay  and  Cayucos  which  is  potentially  good  clam 
bearing-  beach.  Sportsmen  have  planted  clams  in  various  places,  supple- 
menting the  few  already  present,  in  the  hope  of  building  up  future  clam- 
ming along  this  stretch  of  the  coast.  At  the  time  the  Oceano  preserve 
was  established,  another  area  which  extends  li  miles  north  from  Morro 
Rock,  -was  also  made  a  refuge.  The  portion  of  Cayucos  beach  between 
Big  Creek  and  Old  Creek  was  closed  to  digging  by  the  Fish  and  Game 
Commission  on  September  29,  1950.  Both  the  Morro  and  Cayucos  pre- 
serves were  established  at  the  request  of  San  Luis  Obispo  County  sports- 
men. The  census  sections  are  in  these  recently  closed  areas. 

1  Submitted  for  publication  January,  1951. 

(331) 


332 


CALIFORNIA    n>ll    AND   GAME 


Until  L949,  the  census  was  confined  to  Pismo  Beach.  In  the  1948 
census,  only  the  ( >ceano  section  was  dug.  All  five  sections  were  <ln<r  in 
1949  and  all  bul  the  Pismo  section  in  November,  L950. 

The  number  of  clams  found  are  shown  by  age  in  Table  1  and  by  size 
in  Table  2.  Zero  year  clams  are  those  spawned  the  year  of  the  census. 
( >ne-year  clams  are  those  spawned  the  year  before  and  are  approaching 
two  years  of  age.  Table  1  shows  22  zero  group  clams  taken  from  the  Morro 
and  Cayucos  sections  in  1949.  No  one-year  clams  were  found  on  these 
-'•'•nuns  in  1950,  indicating  a  total  loss  of  whal  mitihl  have  been  a  fair 
se1  of  young  clams. 

The  results  of  the  clam  censuses  are  perturbing.   First,  there  has 

I n  an  almosl  complete  lack  of  young  clams  for  the  pasl  three  years, 

-  :ond,  there  has  been  a  reduction  each  year  in  the  total  number  of  clams 
found.  The  1950  clam  census  showed  the  smallest  clam  population  since 
1941.  The  backlog  of  old  clams  in  the  ('"nun-  refuge  (Le  Grande)  was 
reduced,  in  one  season,  to  the  point  where  diggers  are  now  getting  very 
few  except  those  jusl  reaching  five  inches,  the  minimum  legal  size.  In 


TABLE   1 

Number  of  Clams  by  Age  Groups 

Pismo  Beach 


•    - 

1949 

1950 

\_"   in  years 

Oceano 

( >ceano 

Le 
'  Irande 

Pismo 

Total 

Oceano 

Le 
Grande 

Total 

0 

1 

1 

7 
53 
1 9 1 
65 
73 
52 
13 
15 

1 

39 
97 

31 
21 
29 
24 
13 
•5 

3 
33 

77 

27 

15 

6 

2 

1 
6 

1 

1 

2 

14 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

69 

20 
17 
12 
5 
15 

15 

18 

41 

34 

6 

17 
41 
39 
27 
16 
13 

5 
9 
2.5 
19 
9 
7 

22 

50 
64 
46 
25 

8+ 

20 

Totals 

259 

163 

153 

154 

470 

L54 

74 

228 

Morro    Bay — Cayucos    Beaches 


Age  in  years 

1949 

1950 

Morro 

Total 

Morro 

Cayucos 

Total 

0 

3 

19 

22 

1    . 

2 

7 
1 
1 
33 
31 
1 

7 

2 
41 
31 

1 

3 

1 
1 
8 

4 

2 
2 
6 

7 
15 

1 

3 

2 

6 

1 

1 

7 

7 

8 

8+ 

15 

Totals 

77 

29 

•      106 

32 

3 

35 

PISMO    CLAM    CENSUSES,    1948,    1949.    I950 

TABLE   2 

Number  of  Clams  by  Size 
Pismo  Beach 


:;:::: 


1948 

1949 

1950 

Inclii  - 

Oceano 

Oceano 

I..- 
1  Irande 

Pismo 

1 
( Irande 

Under    1 

1 

1 

1    • 

13 

_' 

1 

6 

1 

1 

2  3 

76 

21 

g 

2 

32 

1 

3 

3-4 

86 

95 

7  j 

50 

217 

ri 

32 

81 

4-5 

80 

12 

57 

92 

I'M 

90 

in 

130 

5  6 

4 

2 

13 

21 

1 1 

1 

12 

6  + 

1 

1 

Totals 

162 

153 

154 

169 

1 53 

71 

227 

Morro    Bay- 

—Cay  ucos 

3eaches 

[nchea 

1949 

1950 

Morro 

( !aj  ucos 

Total 

Morro 

( !aj 

Total 

3 

18 

21 

2  3 

1 

13 
56 

4 

1 
14 

6 

3-4. 

4-5 
5  6 

1 

7 
2 

6 

is 
8 

6 

; 

21 
8 

6+ 

Totals-.      -. 

77 

28  1 

105 

32 

3 

35 

1  One  clam  injured  and  not  measured. 

L949,  L3  days  after  the  refuge  was  opened,  the  section  yielded  14  legal 
sized  clams.  In  1950,  the  same  section  contained  jusl  one  legal  clam,  and 
it  was  exactly  five  inches.  In  addition,  the  number  of  smaller  (dams  in 
the  Lie  Grande  section  in  1950  was  approximately  one-half  that  of  1949. 

Somewhat  similar  reductions  in  numbers  occurred  in  the  other  sections. 
There  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  present  status  of  the  Pismo  clams  on 
these  beaches  is  bad.  However,  there  is  also  reason  to  expect  good  sets 
of  young  clams  in  the  next  few  years  and  that  the  clam  population  will 
be  re-established,  at  least  temporarily. 

Legislation  has  gone  about  as  far  as  possible  toward  protecting  the 
Pismo  clams,  but  there  is  considerable  that  individual  diggers  can  do 
toward  the  preservation  of  this  valuable  mollusk  and  the  fine  recreation 
that  is  dependent  upon  its  continued  abundance.  Undersized  clams  should 
be  replaced  in  the  sand  close  to  where  they  were  dug  or  if  washed  out 
by  a  storm,  they  should  be  returned  to  the  water  where  they  can  survive. 
It  is  best  to  bury  the  clams  just  under  the  surface  of  the  sand,  with  the 
hingelike  ligament  up  and  toward  the  sea. 


33  t  I  AX.IPORNIA    PISH     Wl>   GAME 

REFERENCES 

A|.lin._.l      \ 

1  ;•  47.     Pismo  clam  increase.  Calif.  Fish  and  Game,  vol.  33,  no.  •"■.  p.  129-131. 
Pitch,  John  E. 

1950.     The  Pismo  clam.  Calif.  Fish  and  Game,  vol.  36,  no.  3,  p.  285  312. 
]  [errington,  William  I '. 

1930.     The  Pismo  clam,  further  studies  of  its  life  history  and  depletion.  Calif.  Div. 
Fish  and  Game,  Fish  Bull.  18,  69  p.,  16  figs. 
\Vi\\  mouth,  Frank  W. 

1923.     The  life  history  and  growth  of  the  Pismo  clam.   {Tivela  stultorum  Mawe). 
Calif.  Fish  and  ( tame  <  !omm.,  Fish  Bull.  7.  120  p.,  14  figs. 


PSEUDOFINS  ON  THE  CAUDAL  PEDUNCLE  OF 
JUVENILE  SCOMBROIDS1 

By  Earl  S.  Hekat.i) 

Steinharl  Aquarium,  California  Academj  of  Sciences 

San  Francisco 

While  studying  Philippine  frigate  mackerel  (Auxis  thazard  and 
Auxis  tapeinosoma  as  a  member  of  the  Philippine  Fishery  Program  of 
the  U.  S.  Fisli  and  Wildlife  Service,  the  writer  was  surprised  To  find  that 
two  of  the  three  solid  ridges  which  are  conspicuous  along  the  side  of  the 
tail  of  adult  Auxis  actually  develop  a-  small,  anstriated,  finlike  struc- 
ture-. At  a  later  date  through  the  courtesy  of  the  Pacific  Oceanic  Fish 
eries  Investigations  of  the  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service,  the  writer  was 
enabled  to  examine  a  series  of  juvenile  Costa  Rican  .1  uxis.  'I' he  pseudofins 
along  the  caudal  peduncle  of  these  specimens  proved  to  he  similar  in  all 
respects  to  those  of  the  Philippine  material.  .Mr.  John  E.  Fitch,  of  the 
California  Division  of  Fish  and  (lame,  ha-  told  me  that  in  nine  small 
Auxis  from  the  .Mexican  eoasl  well-developed  pseudofins  were  found  in 
a  42  nun.  specimen.  Pseudofins  were  just  forming  in  a  32  mm.  specimen 
but  were  not  discernible  in  the  remaining  seven  which  ranged  from  13 
to  L'7  mm. 

The  lateral  ridges  in  which  the  fin  cays  develop  may  sometimes  he 
discernible  in  fish  as  small  as  I'll  mm.  i  standard  length  I.  In  others  they 
may  not  develop  until  the  fish  is  nearly  .'III  mm.  The  greatest  development 
of  the  pseudofins  usually  takes  place  -a  hen  the  fish  is  between  30  and 
40  mm.  By  the  time  the  fish  has  attained  the  latter  length  the  pseudofins 
are  invariably  well  developed  (Figure  147). 

Submitted  for  publication  December,  1950. 


<■'<:■■<; 


Figure   147.     Lateral  view  of  the  caudal  peduncle  of  a   42  mm.  Auxis  thazard  from 
Menado,  Celebes.  Cross-sectional  view  at  left.  Pablo  Bravo,  del. 


(335  ) 


336  CALIF<  IRN  I  \    FISH    AND  <;am  i: 

Under  the  microscope  each  .1  uxis  pseudofin  is  usually  tun  ml  to  con- 
sist of  11  unstriated  sofl  rays.  On  some  specimens  as  many  ;is  14  rays 
have  been  counted.  These  structures  probably  have  no  outstanding 
anatomical  significance  and  are  undoubtedly  similar  to  the  ceratotrichia 
of  other  vertebrates.  There  seems  to  be  no  possibility  thai  the  pseudofins 
could  nave  developed  as  extensions  of  the  lateral  fin  folds  after  the 
<  regenbauer  I  heory. 

No  mention  of  the  presence  or  development  of  the  pseudofins  lias 
been  found  in  the  literature.  This  may  be  due  to  the  fact  that  even  when 
present,  they  are  not  readily  apparent.  However,  under  a  dissecting 
microscope,  the  use  of  a  small  probe  will  quickly  bring  them  into  view. 

The  lengths  which  frigate  mackerel  attain  before  these  pseudofins 
disappear  and  are  replaced  by  a  solid  ridge  is  not  definitely  known.  One 
specimen  of  95  mm.  from  the  Gulf  of  California  had  well-developed 
pseudofins.  Mr.  Charles  15.  Wade  of  the  Philippine  Fishery  Program  has 
kindly  examined  some  juvenile  .1  uxis  thazard  (140-231  mm.,  fork  length  ) 
from  Batangas,  P.  I.  He  finds  that  the  rays  of  pseudofins  are  present  but 
he  believes  that  he  detects  an  indication  that  these  false  fins  are  in  the 
process  of  being  lost  when  the  fish  is  about  200  mm.  in  length. 

In  none  of  the  juvenile  .1  n.ris  or  other  scombroids  examined  by  the 
writer  has  the  center  ridge  of  the  caudal  peduncle  shown  any  fin  struc- 
ture. Yet  the  marks  on  the  ridge  seem  to  suggest  that  at  sometime  in  the 
ontogeny  of  the  species,  this  ridge  must  have  carried  a  pseudofin  similar 
to  the  paired  structures  developed  laterally.  Among  other  scombroids 
available  for  examination  was  a  113  mm.  skipjack  (Katsuwonus  pelamis  I 
from  Costa  Rica  (previously  reported  by  Eckles,  1949,  p.  246,  fig.  1). 
Since  this  specimen  had  been  taken  from  the  stomach  of  an  adult  tuna, 
some  of  the  tail  was  partially  digested.  On  one  side  it  was  possible  to 
count  11  rays  of  the  pseudofin.  but  on  the  opposite  side  there  were  14. 
Mr.  Wade  examined  three  Katsuwonus  from  the  Pilas  Island  group  of 
the  Sulu  Archipelago,  P.  I.  Two  of  the  specimens,  18  and  22  mm.,  showed 
indication  of  the  false  fins.  On  the  third  specimen.  25.5  mm.,  develop- 
ment was  just  starting. 

Mr.  Wade  also  reports  14-rayed  pseudofins  on  juvenile  Philippine 
Euthynnus  affinis  yaito  of  a  size  range  between  38  and  125  mm. 

Three  young  specimens  (17-63  mm.)  of  Costa  Rican  Spanish  mack- 
erel (8 comb eromorus  sierra)  were  examined  (also  previously  reported  by 
Eckles,  1949,  p.  247,  figs.  2  and  3).  Strangely  enough  they  showed  no 
evidence  of  pseudofins  on  the  peduncle  although  the  largest  specimen 
had  the  ridges  slightly  developed.  More  juveniles  of  this  species  are 
needed  to  determine  whether  the  pseudofins  develop  late  or  are  possibly 
absent  at  all  stages. 

Based  on  the  four  species  reported  upon  herein,  it  would  seem  that 
most  of  the  adult  scombroids  showing  ridges  on  the  side  of  the  caudal 
peduncle  probably  pass  through  a  pseudofin  stage  in  their  development. 


PSEUDOFINS  ON  JUVENILE  SCOMBROIDS  337 

REFERENCES 
Eckles,  Howard  II. 

r.(4'.t.     Observations    on    juvenile   oceanic   skipjack    (Katsuwonus    pelamis)    from 
Hawaiian    waters    and    sierra    mackerel     (8 comber omorus   sierra)    from   the 
eastern  Pacific.  I".  S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Serv.,  Fishery  Bull.,  vol.  51,  no.  48, 
,,.  245  250,3  figs. 
Fraser  Brunner,  A. 

l'.tp.i.     on  the  fishes  "f  the  LL.-t.u-  Euthynnus.  Ann.  Mag.  Xat.  Hist.,  ser.  12,  vol.  2, 

p.  622  627,  2  figs. 
L950.     The  tishe<  of  the  family  Scombridae.  Ann.  Mag.  Xat.  Hist.,  ser.  12.  vol.  3, 
p.  131-HKi.  :jr.  Hks. 
Kishinouj  e,  Kamakiehi 

L923.     Contributions   to   the  comparative  studj    of  the  so-called  scombroid  fishes. 
College  Amir.   Imperial   Qniv.  Tokyo,  Journ.,  vol.  8,  do.  .">.  p.  293  175,  26 
figs.,  22  pis. 
Wade,  Charles  B. 

1949.  .Votes  on  the  Philippine  frigate  mackerels,  family  Thunnidae,  genus  iuxis. 
U.  S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Serv.,  Fisherj  Bull.,  vol.  51,  ao.  46,  p.  229-240, 
Ki  figs. 

1950.  Juvenile  forms  of  Veothunnus  macropterus,  Katsuwonus  pelamis  and 
Euthynnus  yaito  from  Philippine  seas.  U.  S.  Fish  ami  Wildlife  Serv.,  Fishery 
Bull.,  vol.  51,  no.  53,  p.  :'.'.»:,  104,  L3  figs. 


AGE  AND  LENGTH  COMPOSITION 

OF  THE  SARDINE  CATCH  OFF  THE  PACIFIC 

COAST  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  AND 

CANADA  IN  1950  51 ' 

By  Frances  E.  I'i  i  i\.    United  States  Fish  and  Wildlife  Sen  ire 

A  \  1 1  \  E.  1 1  \i  (.in  im'v  and  Leo  Pink  \s.  California 

Division  of  Fish  and  <  lame 

This  is  the  fifth  reporl  on  the  age  and  length  composition  of  the 
sardine  catch  (iff  the  Pacific  Coast  of  the  United  States  and  Canada  and 
covers  the  1950-5]  season.  Pre"*  inns  reports  have  presented  such  data  for 
the  1941-42  through  L949-50 seasons  I  Felin,  Daugherty  and  Pinkas,  1950; 
Kelin  and  Phillips.  1948;  Felin,  Phillips  and  Daugherty,  1949;  Mosher, 
Pel  in  and  Phillips.  pi  I'i  i.  The  it  was  qo  fishery  off  the  British  <  Jolumbia, 
Washington  and  Oregon  coasts  in  this  season.  The  interseason  (summer) 
fishery  in  California  was  prohibited  by  law. 

During  1950-51  sardines  were  landed  a1  San  Francisco,  Moss  Land- 
ing, Monterey.  Mbrro  Bay,  Port  San  Luis,  Santa  Barbara,  Hueneme,  Los 
A.ngeles-Long  Beach  Harbor,  Newporl  Beach  and  San  Diego.  Some  of 
these  fish  were  trucked  to  other  ports  for  processing.  All  fish  landed  at  San 
Francisco  were  processed  t  here  and  appear  In  i  he  San  Francisco  tonnages. 
Monterey  totals  include  fish  landed  at  that  port,  at  Moss  Landing  and  at 
Morro  Bay.  This  combines  ports  south  of  San  Francisco  hut  north  of 
Point  Conception.  All  Landings  made  south  of  Point  Conception  except 
San  Diego  were  included  with  the  San  Pedro  I  Los  Angeles-Long  Peach 
Harbor)  tonnages.  San  Diego  totals  include  all  landings  at  that  port. 
Since  Point  Conception  marks  a  division  in  oceanic  conditions  and  sep- 
arates two  resultant  fishing  grounds,  this  grouping  more  accurately 
reflects  the  distribution  of  sardines  in  the  ocean  than  would  a  grouping 
according  to  the  place  of  processing. 

The  methods  used  in  determining  ages  and  sampling  the  catch  have 
been  described  (Walford  and  Mosher,  1943a  and  b;  Felin  and  Phillips, 
1948).  Previously,  the  sampling  methods  yielded  a  random  selection  of 
scale  samples  from  the  length  frequency  distribution  of  the  fish.  In  the 
1950-51  season  the  sampling  methods  were  modified  with  the  intent  of  im- 
proving their  accuracy  without  a  prohibitive  increase  in  the  amount  of 
work  required.  The  methods  are  similar  to  those  used  previously,  with 
the  following  exceptions:  Instead  of  five  samples  of  50  fish  per  week  (in 
each  port),  10  samples  of  50  fish  each  were  taken  per  week.  Five  samples 
were  taken  in  the  first  half  of  the  week  (Monday  through  Wednesday) 
and  five  were  taken  in  the  last  half  (Thursday  through  Saturday) .  Instead 
of  securing  10  scale  samples  at  random  with  respect  to  fish  length  from 
each  sample  of  50  fish,  one  scale  sample  was  taken  at  random  from  each 

1  Submitted  for  publication  March,  1951. 

2  Published  by  permission  of  the  Director,  U.  S.  Pish  and  Wildlife  Service. 

(  339  ) 


340 


CALIFORNIA    PISH     IND  GAME 
130°  125°  I20c 


BRITISH  COLUMBIA 


WASHINGTON 


OREGON 


CALIFORNIA 


AN  PEDRO 

\san\diego 


50c 


45C 


40° 


35° 


130° 


125 


120' 


Figure  14  8.     Sardine  fishing  areas.  VII-XIII,  areas  in  the  Pacific  Northwest  fishery. 
A,  San  Francisco-Monterey  fishing  grounds.  B,  Southern  California  fishing  grounds. 


SARDINE  CATCH  IN"  I950-5I 


341 


centimeter  interval  (i.e.,  181-190,  191-200  mm.,  etc.)  of  fish  length  in  the 
sample  of  50  fish.  Thus,  the  scale  samples  ;uv  random  with  respect  to  fish 
length  onhj  within  each  centimeter  Length  stratum. 

Tables  1  through  5  show,  by  sex  and  region  of  catch,  the  length  fre- 
quency distributions  of  fish  of  each  year  class  sampled  in  the  1950-51 
season.  The  centimeter  strata  from  which  the  scales  were  selected  ran- 
domly with  respect  to  fish  Length  are  indicated  by  the  horizontal  lines. 


TABLE    1 
Length    Composition    of   the    1948   Year-Class,   Age   2,   1950-51 


Length,  nun. 


San  Francisco 


Monterej 


San  Pedro 


\l 


\l 


M 


California 


M 


178 

180. 


182- 

184. 

is., 

188, 

L90 


1  1  2 

7  1  8 

hi        5       15 


L92 
L94 
196 
L9S 

200. 


4 

7 

9 

23 


3 

14 
23 
25 
54 


202 

1 

1 

2 

t 
1 
2 

7 

2 

3 
2 

s 

4 
1 

* 

4 
l.-> 

in 
Hi 

.5 
6 

10 
8 
7 
9 
8 

20 

24 
12 

1  1 
14 

13 

20 

7 
8 
14 

12 

8 
11 
13 
17 

2.5 

204 

28 

206 

1 
1 

1 

1 

2    3 

1    2 

18 

208.. 

21 

!10 

31 

212    

2 
3 
2 

1 
2 

1 
1 

2 

7 
4 

! 

9 

2 
.5 

1 

11 

7 
•"> 
3 
1 

20 
9 

!0 

1 
1 

11 
6 

7 
1 

11 
12 
7 
4 
2 

22 

21  1 

1 

1 

18 

216 

14 

218 

220 

2 

,22 

1 

"i 

3 

4 
1 

1 

4 
4 
1 
2 

1 
2 

1 

3 
4 
3 
1 

4 

22  1 

2 

2 

2 
2 

6 

226 

3 

228 

2 

230 

i 

1 

1 

-- 

1 



234 

236 

2 

2 

2 

2 

238 

240 

242 

-- 

1 

1 

-- 

1 

1 

Totals 

o 

5   10 

40 

36 

76 

142 

120 

262 

187 

161 

348 

342 


<    \I  [FORN  I A    FISB    A.ND   GAME 


TABLE    2 
Length    Composition   of   the    1947    Year-Class.   Age   3,   1950-51 


I  ength,  mum. 

>:in 

1  rancLsco 

Mont,  n 

San  Pedro 

'  'aliforil 

a 

M 

1' 

T 

M   1    T 

M    1     1 

M   F 

T 

i 'in 

1   _     1 

1    1    2 

2    1 

3 

192  . 

I'.H 

1        1 
3    1    4 
8..8 
12    .5   17 

4 

1    1 
9 
16    6 

4 

196 

1   ..    1 
I   -.    1 
1   ..    1 

5 

198 

9 

200 

3 

1 

4 

22 

202  . 

1    1    2 
1    1    2 
3    I    4 
9   -     9 
5    4    9 

5    4    9 
7   1 2 
9    1   10 
2    7    9 
5   13   18 

6  5 

7  8 
12    2 
14    8 
10   18 

1  1 

201 

1 

-- 

1 

15 

206.. 

14 

208 

210 

3 

1 

1 

4 

1 

22 
28 

212 

2    1    3 
8    2   10 
4    4    8 
2    2    4 
7    3   10 

15    4   19 
5    6   11 

4  10   14 

5  1 0   1 5 
2    6    8 

17    5 
13    8 
10   16 
9   13 
13   10 

22 

214  . 

21 

216 

218 

220 

2 

2 

4 

2 

1 
1 

4 
3 

26 
22 
23 

222            

224 

226 

1 
1 

4 
4 

4 

4 

5 

4 
4 
] 
4 

3    6    9 

5    1    6 
5    3    8 
1    3    4 
5    5   10 

5   25   30 
3   12   15 

..4    4 
3    9   12 
1    1    2 

9   35 
8   17 
5   11 

5  12 

6  10 

44 
25 
16 

228.. 
230 

17 
16 

232            

234 

236 

1 
2 

2 

1 

3 
3 

3  7   10 

1  7    8 

2  2    4 

4  3    7 
5 

..3    3 

3    5    8 

1    1 

1  1 

2  2 

4   12 
6   13 
2    3 
6    6 
8 

16 

19 
5 

238_- 

240 

2 

2 

1 

4 

1 

12 
8 

242 . 

244__. 

2 

1 

3 

1    1    2 

1    _.    1 

1    1 

1   ..     1 

..2    2 

1    1 

3    3 
1 

1 
1 

2 

6 

1 

246 

1 

248..- 

1 

250 

2 

252  __ 

254 

2    2 

2 

2 

Totals 

25 

30 

55 

77   (17   144 

100  139  239 

202  236 

438 

SARDINE    CATCH    IX    1950-51 


343 


TABLE   3 
Length  Composition  of  the  1946  Year-Class,  Age  4,  in  1950-51 


Length,  nun. 

San  Francisco 

Muii' 

San  Pedro 

California 

M         1          T 

M         F          T 

M         F         T 

M         F         T 

196 

1         ..          1 

1                     1 

198.  _ 

2                     2 

1  1 

2  1          3 

1                     l 

200.. 

4           1           5 

202 

204 

1  1 

2  2 
4                      1 
1          2         3 

2                    2 

1  2            3 
2            1 

2  3          5 

.'{                  :; 

206 

3           2           5 

JUS 

210 

1                     1 
1         2         3 

7  2  9 
4         7        11 

212 

.'1  1 

1          1 

1          3 
3         3         6 

2  3         5 

7 

3  1          4 

2           5           7 
1           '. 

6         3         9 

2        :.        7 
2         1         a 

7  12 
8         7        15 

216 

1         I         2 

1           1          2 

2 

9         7        16 

218 
220 

8  8  16 
5           4           9 

222 

2                    2 
4          1          5 

1           :<,          1 

1  2           A 

2  6         8 
a        a        t; 
l         l 

6         8       14 

3          8        11 

A         8 

3          2          5 

1         2         :; 

9         1  1         2(1 

224 

X         11         19 

226 

7       9      it; 

228 

1           1 

6        6       12 

230.. 

2        6 

232 

3         3 

1          1 

1         2         3 

1  fi        7 

2  1;          s 
1         4 

3        5 
2        2 

7         7 
1          8         9 
1          3          4 

2 
1          1          2 

1         Hi        17 

23  I 

3         15         IS 

236 

3           9         12 

238 

2          5         7 

240 

1           3           4 

242 

7          7 
1                     1 
2 

1  1 

2  2 

1                     1 

1          2          3 

1           1 

1          7          8 

244 

2          2          4 

246 
248 

1          1         2 
1                    1 

1           4 

1           1           2 

250 

2          2 

252 

1                     1 
1          .          1 

1                      1 

254  _. 

1          1 

1          1          2 

256 

258 

1                    1 

1          1 

1           1          2 

Totals _ 

16        17       33 

42        64      106 

50       73     123 

108     154     262 

344 


CALIPORN  I A    FISB    AND   QAM] 


TABLE   4 
Length  Composition  of  the   1945  Year-Class,  Age  5,  in  1950-51 


Length,  nun. 

Sun  Francisco             Monterey 

San  Pedro 

California 

M        1         T 

M         1           T 

M         V         T 

M         F          T 

198   

1                     1 

1                    1 

2        ..          2 

200 

202 

204 

1          1 

1          1 

206   .. 

208 

2         2 
1          1 

2         2 

210   _ 

1          1 

212 

1  ..          1 

2  2 
2          1          3 

1        __          1 

21  1 

1          1 
1          _          1 

1        ..          1 
1          1          2 

2          1         3 

216    . 

1                  1 
1         1 

4          1         5 

218 

I          1         2 

220     . 

1                    1 

2          1         3 

222 

1          1          2 
1          1 

2         2         4 
2          1          3 
..11 

3         3         6 

224 

2         2         4 

226 

1          1 

228 

3         2         5 

1          1 

2          13            5         3         8 

230  . 

2         2 

3         3 

232 

234 

2       ._         2 

1       __         1 

1          1 

1        __          1 
1          1         2 
1        ..          1 

1          3         4 

3         4         7 
2        __         2 

236 

1         2         3 
1          1 

2         3         5 

238 

1          1         2 

240 

242 

1          1 

1        ..          1 

1          1          2 

244 

1         1 

1          1 

246 

1          1 

1          1 

248 

250 

252 

1          1 

1          1 

25  1 

256 

1                     1 
1          1 

1        __          1 

258 

1          1 

260 

266    . 

1          1 

1          1 

Totals 

4          2          6 

12        18       30 

16       14       30 

32       34       66 

SARDINE    CATCH    IN    1950-51 


345 


0 

(-  ^ 

03    oj 

>>  <a 
0  m- 

# 

'3 

O 

«3 

O 

:  :  :  :  : 

-  : 

- 

1  °° 

<M    co 

-    i 

05  .2 

**     CJ 

# 

03 
| 

0 

fa 
1$ 

- 

- 

~    g 
>.  " 
CO    of 

as  js 

* 

03 

= 
0 

"3 
0 

fa 

3 

CI 
CI 

- 

-    - 

- 

co 

CM 

50 
£1 
M 

03 

10 

i 

03 

Si 

>> 
Ttl 

0 

03 
'S 

0 

fa 
3 

-  -       - 

—  re 

—    - 

co  — 
co  — 

Z 
M 

O 

0 

■c 
a> 

Pl, 

a 

03 
CO 

fa 

-1 

•N 

- 

re  — 

CO  — 

OJ 

OJ 

3 

0 

3 

fa 

3 

H        ! 

__ 

~          - 

•* 

CO 

0 

'3 

e 

oj 

c 

03 

oq 

fa 
2 

_ 

„ 

,-,    !    !    !    ! 

co 

£ 

M 

C 

►J 

■*'  d  00  d 

1-1  —  1-1  cn 
NIMNN 

N  ■*  OOOO 
N  M  N  tl  X 
NNMNN 

<N  «*l 
CO  CO 

CM  c^ 

(N  Tf  d  00  0 

■^    Tjl     -^     Tf    CO 

CM  CN  CN  CM  CM 

CM  ■*'  O  00  d 
UO  »C  »-0  »0  CO 
CM  (N  CM  CM  CM 

CM 

CO 
CM 

<n  ■*  d 
r-  t~  r~ 

CM  CM  O) 

CO 
CM 

/. 
"3 

0 
H 

346 


CALIFORNIA   FISH   AND   GAME 


Table  6  shows,  1>\  sex  and  region  of  catch,  the  mean  length  and 
standard  error  of  the  mean  for  each  year  class  sampled  in  the  1950-51 
season.  These  are  simply  based  on  the  total  samples  for  the  season  and 
are  not  weighted  according  to  the  relative  proportions  of  the  total  catch 
made  in  the  different  lunar  months.  They  are,  however,  of  necessity 
weighted  according  to  the  Length  frequency  distributions  of  the  50-fish 
samples. 


TABLE   6 

Mean    Length    and    Standard    Error   of   the    Mean    in    Millimeters   for    Each 
Year-Class  in  the  1950-51   Season  by   Region  of  Catch 


California 

Yiar-<    hi  — 

San  Francisco 

Monterey 

San  Pedro 

M. 

S.E. 

M. 

S.E. 

M. 

S.E. 

1948 

Male      ..     .. .....     ... 

Female    .      .        .            .    

Totals    

1947 

Male 

208 
210 
209 

218 
223 
221 

220 
222 
221 

222 
219 
222 

224 
216 

220 

1.53 

1.37 
1.06 

1.77 
1.24 
1.05 

1.82 
2.21 
1.50 

4.90 
5.18 
3.71 

7.61 
4.82 

210 
213 
212 

219 
223 
220 

219 
224 
222 

224 
222 

222 

223 
225 
223 

242 
274 
259 

1.32 
1.34 

.98 

.87 
.80 
.65 

1.20 
.98 
.80 

2.06 
2.36 

1.91 

5.01 
4.54 
1.01 

203 
206 
205 

208 
213 
211 

214 
216 
215 

217 
224 

219 

221 
230 
223 

.46 
.46 
.36 

.70 

Female    _ .      _    _      _          _      _            _    

Totals    _' 

1946 

Male 

Female      ...      .__-._ . 

Totals.    

1945 

Male 

Female     _       . .    .    .                .        .... 

Totals   

1944 

Male 

Female _ 

Totals   

.62 

.49 

1.15 
1.01 

.77 

2.23 
2.56 

1.85 

1.01 
1.91 
1.99 

1943 

Male 

Totals _ 

1942 

Male 

258 
258 

Totals. 

1940 

Male 

Female                 ._          .    

272 
272 

Totals.    

SARDINE   CATCH   IN    1950-51  347 

TABLE   7 
Calendar    Dates   of   Lunar   Months  for  the    1950-51    Season 

"August  July  30- August  27 

"September" August  28-September  26 

"October" September  27-October  25 

"November' ' - October  26- November  24 

"December" November  25-December  23 

"January" December  24-January  22 

"February".    January  23-February  20 

Table  7  gives  the  calendar  dates  for  the  Lunar  months  in  the  season. 

Table  8  gives  the  numbers  of  fish,  by  region  of  catch,  in  each  year 
••lass  caught  during  the  season.  The  number  of  fish  caught  was  estimated 
from  the  total  weight  landed  at  each  port  in  each  week  divided  by  the 
average  weight  of  the  fish  during  that  period.  These  were  summed  by 
lunar  months  and  ports.  The  apportionment  of  numbers  of  fish  among  the 
several  year  classes  caught  each  lunar  month  at  each  port  was  slightly 
more  complicated  than  previously,  owing  to  the  change  in  sampling 
methods.  From  the  age  data,  the  percentage  ,.f  each  year  class  within 
each  centimeter  Length  stratum  was  calculated.  These  percentages  were 
then  weighted  according  to  the  length  frequency  distributions  of  the  50- 
lish  samples.  The  resulting  percentages  were  used  in  allocating  the  num- 
ber of  fish  among  the  different  year  classes 

Scale  samples  and  fish  measurements  were  obtained  at  San  Francisco 
by  Carl  \V.  Walser,  a1  .Monterey  by  Leo  Pinkas  and  at  San  Pedro  by 
Amta  E.  Daugherty.  Age  determinations  were  made  by  the  three  authors. 
We  wish  to  acknow  Ledge  with  thanks  the  assistance  of  Mr.  Walser  and  of 
Mrs.  Madalyn  15.  Murray  in  the  laboratory.  Special  thanks  are  due  to 
Mr.  T.  M.  Widrig  for  his  valuable  advice  in  connection  with  sampling 
problems. 


348 


t  ALIFORNIA    risn    AND  <;  \  \i  I 


o    _ 

lO        r 
OS      S 


-5-        3 
-t->        ~ 


CO 


O     X 


- 

03 

Oi 

a 

c 

— 

-. 

:  : 

o 

o 

o 

sc 

CD 

CO 

cn 

oo 

— 

OS 

1-            1- 

CN 

CN 

r.          i  co     ' 

CO 

■z 

01 

CO 

oo 

CO 

t^ 

0! 

00 

oo 

—  01   oo  00  i-H       I 

r_l 

—   CO        i        i   00 

CI 

00 

11 

O      i 

o 

■  o  x  -r  r~  oo 

"* 

o  oo     i     'oo 

i  - 

oo 

m 

CO 

CO 

-  co  oi  ?i  r- 

CO_ 

oo_  co_    i     '  eo 

us 

CD 

oo 

IN 

Ol" 

lo" 

"  -f    !     ',  ■-< 

^* 

in 

<!L 

!D 

— 

"o 

03 

1) 

.>> 

i 

OS 

00 

oo 

O  00  OS  c 

!•- 

—    01   1-   01    '0 

o 

m 

o 

so 

.0 

in 

CO   D.  —   — 

Oaosc 

- 

Tl< 

CO 

03 

01 

CN 

01_  —_  oi  x 

m 

CD    CO    —    X    i0 

•  -. 

CO 

as 

>, 

— 

CO 

CO 

co" 

■0  oi"  — "  of 

0 1*  DC   DC  CO" 

oo" 

oo" 

X! 

lo 

m 

t~ 

cd 

<~ 

Lri 

00  o 

oo 

-f    00   —    i-l   CO   "* 

-1 

LO   h   o   11)    rt 

oo 

03 

CO 

as  t~ 

CD 

cd  co  r--  co  o  '-o 

CO 

CN  OI  CO  -if  -^f 

CO 

t- 

t~ 

rC 

Ol    i-l 

— 

oi  ~  ■-  cr  —  r. 

°1 

rc  'C  N  f  N 

t> 

00 

0 

DC 

o 

d 

— '  -x  ,-  -/  ,-  _" 

CD' 

od  Dc  ~r  oc"  loJ 

t~" 

oo" 

oo" 

^ 

CM 

Ol 

CO 

l-NOOif 

OS 

oo 

£ 

CN 

00 

oo  m 

CO 

■nf  LO  r~  Ol  00  Ol 

oo 

CD    CD    —    '0    i0 

CD 

co 

00 

lo  CD 

01 

•r  •■  -  t  00  o 

CO 

nocieo 

00 

CN 

t~ 

CD_f~ 

-r_ 

-t  r~  co  --  cr  oi 

CO 

oi  i~  oo  oi  oi 

CN 

t}< 

t>-_ 

-r 
OS 

CO 

i--" 

CD"   DC    DC   CO"  O   i-O" 

oo" 

~~.  oo'  r-"  co'  in 

in 

«" 

as" 

CO 

CO 

CO 

Ol                  —    01 

t^ 

•  0    1 DC    — 

CO 

oo 

CO    —   01 

oo 

co- 

CO OS 

01 

co  cn  —  d.  r-  r. 

— 

T   DNMN 

r_i 

00 

rn 

CD   00 

'" 

10 CO    t^    01 

CN 

-r  o  00  lo  © 

T)i 

Tt> 

CO 

CO   i-i 

LO 

C0_  CD_  — I   —   CD    01 

-r 

PC   -I  IO  N  N 

LO 

00_ 

CO 

03 

lO    rH 

CO" 

co"  co"  oi"  cd'  cd'  01 

r~" 

oo"  co"  Ol"  ■*  oo" 

t--" 

oT 

,_c 

04 

CO 

■*  in  oo  i> 

CO 

CN 

fMH 

CO 

LO  ■* 

03 

•0   D.  r^  CD  CD  L0 

CN 

CD    01    -f   LO  CO 

t~ 

^^ 

OS 

00  CM 

o 

-r  DD  co  co  —  X 

CN 

:.  >:  X  B  if 

o 

CO 

CD 

c 

00  i-H 

o 

IC    —  t-   CO   '0    CO 

CD 

01   —   CO  CO  lo 

t^ 

CN 

in 

— 
G 

r~."  CN 

o 

l~"   ~    DC    t~    — '  01 

o" 

CD  CD"  -f"  Tf"  — " 

CO" 

CN 

as" 

CD 

r~ 

Tf    "-H    CN    Tt<    Tf    i-H 

C 

O   OI   O  CO  CO 

cc 

CN 

oo 

3 

OI 

OS  CO  LO  CN 

CN 

m 

fc 

CN 

CN 

hS 

cs 

03 

O 

in  - 

CD 

MflOlHOOH 

b- 

00  00  C    DC    D. 

■* 

oo 

f  oo 

CN 

CD  t^  ~r   DC  CO  CD 

t~ 

CD   CD    -T1    L0    CO 

00 

■f 

■*  CN 

t> 

—    -  I  I  -   DC  C0_  O 

o_ 

r~  i-i  Tt<_  — _  oo 

00 

CO 

LO 

c 

N 

01 

oo"  co"  tt"  cd"  cd"  — ' 

CN 

CO"  O"  DC  CN  tjT 

CN 

CN 

o" 

o 

co 

—  00  CD  CO 

o 

in 

H 

CO 

oo 

o 

- 

c 

G 

>> 

c 

OS 

~ 

Z 
G 

^w 

"3 

G 

O 

G 

o 

Francisco 
August" 
September' 

33 

CO 

X 

3 

o 
r- 

nterey 

August" 

September' 

October". . 

November' 

December" 

Januarj  " 

2 

03 
o3 
O 

Pedro 
October"- - 
November' 
1  lecember" 
January".. 
February". 

03 
CO 

"3 
o 

* 

o 

M 

.2 

-d 

G 

03 

0 

c  :    ; 

a 

03 

co 

3 

si 
CO 

03 
CO 

SARDINE    CATCH    IN    I950-5I  349 

REFERENCES 

Felin,  Frances  E.,  Anita  E.  Daugherty  and  Leo  Pinkas 

1950.     Age  and  length  composition  of  the  sardine  catch  off  the  Pacific  Coast  of  the 
United  States  and  Canada  in  1949-50.  Calif.  Fish  and  Came,  vol.  36,  no.  3, 
pp.  241-249, 1  fig. 
Felin,  Frances  F..  and  Julius  B.  Phillips 

L948.     Age  and  length  composition  of  the  sardine  catch  off  the  Pacific  Coasl  of  the 
United  States  and  Canada,   l'.Ul  42  through   L946  17.  Calif.  Div.  Fish  and 
Game,  Fish  Bull.  69, 122  p.,  1  fig. 
Felin,  Frances  F..  Julius  l'>.  Phillips  and  Anita  F.  Daugherty 

L949.     Age  and  length  composition  of  the  sardine  catch  off  the  Pacific  Coast  of  the 
United  States  and  Canada  in  L948  19.  Calif.  Fish  and  Game,  vol.  35,  qo.  '■'>. 
pp.  165  1  S3, 1  fig. 
Mosher,  Kenneth  IF.  Frances  F.  Felin  and  Julius  B.  Phillips 

I'.il'.i.     Age  and  length  composition  of  the  sardine  catch  "if  the  Pacific  Coasl  of  the 
United  States  and  Canada  in  1947  4s.  Calif.  Fish  and  Game,  vol.  35,  qo.  1, 
pp.  15  K),  1  fig. 
Walfor-d,  Lionel  A.,  and  Kenneth  IF  Mosher 

L943a.  Studies  on  the  Pacific  pilchard  or  sardine  (Sardinops  caerulea).  -.  Deter- 
mination of  the  age  of  juveniles  bj  scales  and  otoliths.  F.  S.  Fish  and  Wildlife 
Service.  Special  Sci.  Rept.  no.  20, 19  p.,  32  figs 
L943b.  Studies  on  the  Pacific  pilchard  or  sardine  (Sardinops  caerulea).  '■'<.  Deter- 
mination of  age  of  adults  by  scales,  and  effect  of  environment  on  first  year's 
growth  as  it  bears  on  age  determination.  F.  S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service, 
Special  Sci.  Rept.  no.  21, 29  p.,  6  tigs. 


NOTES 

THE  WHALE  SHARK,  RHINEODON  TYPUS,  OFF 
NORTHERN  BAJA  CALIFORNIA 

While  fishing  a  few  miles  south  of  the  United  States-Mexico  boundary 
near  South  Island  of  Los  Coronados,  Baja  California,  on  January  31, 
1951,  the  passengers  aboard  the  sportfishing  boat  Collever  spotted  a 
school  of  sardines  jumping  wildly  at  the  surface.  Mr.  Offie  Collins,  skipper 
and  owner  of  the  Collever  which  operates  ou1  of  San  Diego,  moved  the 
boat  directly  oyer  the  center  of  activity.  A  large  shark  was  moving  lei- 
surely just  beneath  the  surface  and  seemed  to  be  "feeding  on  the  sar- 
dines."  Collins  stayed  near  the  shark  for  aboul  15  minutes  and ' '  humped 
it  with  the  side  of  the  boal  several  times  for  the  benefil  of  the  passengers.  '* 
The  shark  was  described  as  aboul  20  Peel  long,  brownish  in  color  with 
yellowish  spots,  from  the  size  of  a  quarter  to  that  of  a  saucer,  all  over 
its  body.  The  dorsal  fin  was  rounded  and  the  gill  slits  extended  from  high 
on  the  hark  nearly  to  the  throat  on  the  underside.  Unquestionably  this 
was  ,-i  whale  shark.  Rhineodon  hums. 

The  present  locality  some  30  miles  south  of  San  Diego  is  over  750 
miles  north  of  any  previous  record  on  this  coast.  Gudger  (1935,  Proc. 
Zool.  Soc.  London,  p.  863-893)  has  recorded  this  species  from  Cape  San 
Lucas,  Baja  California,  where  it  is  a  common  sighl  to  California  tuna 
fisherman.-  John  /•.'.  Fitch,  Bureau  of  Marini  Fisheries,  Calif omia Divi- 
sion of  Fish  and  Garni .  F<  bruary,  1951. 

PACIFIC  COD  OFF  CENTRAL  CALIFORNIA 

A  Pacific  cod  (Gadus  macrocephalus  .  2">'  inches  total  length,  was 
captured  off  Pt.  Sur,  about  25  miles  south  of  Monterey,  California,  on 
February  15,  1951.  The  specimen  was  taken  by  the  drag  boat  Liberty, 
Captain  P.M.  Rhoades,  while  otter-trawling  for  chilipepper  and  bocaccio 
rockfish in  100  fathoms.  The  specimen  was  taken  to  the  General  Fish  Cor- 
poration. Monterey,  where  is  was  observed  by  the  author.  Captain 
Rhoades,  who  had  previously  fished  at  Eureka.  California,  stated  that 
he  had  caught  an  occasional  Pacific  cod  in  his  drag  net  while  operating 
in  the  Eureka  region.  In  "California  Fish  and  Game,"  vol.  36,  no.  4, 
p.  439,  October,  1950,  the  author  records  several  specimens  taken  in 
Northern  California.  The  present  record  extends  the  southern  range  of 
this  species  another  300  miles. — ./.  B.  Phillips,  Bureau  of  Marine  Fish- 
eries, California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game,  February,  1951. 


(351) 


352  CALIFORNIA    FISH    AM)   GAME 

RETIREMENT  OF  HARRY  COLE 

Harry  Cole,  Fish  Hatchery  Foreman,  Vnl>;i  River  Hatchery,  retired 
from  the  service  on  April  30,  1951.  He  was  firsl  appointed  Fish  I  latchery 
Foreman  on  December  ■'!.  1928,  with  the  former  Bureau  of  Fish  Culture 
and  was  stationed  al  the  Feather  River  Hatchery.  He  was  later  trans- 
ferred to  the  Basin  Creek  Hatchery  and  since  October,  1941,  has  been  in 
charge  of  the  Yuba  River  Hatchery,  Sierra  County.  During  the  pasl  two 
seasons  Mr.  Cole  has  been  temporarily  stationed  each  spring  a1  the  [die 
wild  Hatchery,  Reno,  Nevada,  to  assisl  in  the  <  lalifornia-Nevada  coopera- 
tive program  for  the  introduction  of  Kokanee  into  Lake  Tahoe.  Before 
coming  to  the  Division  of  Fish  and  Game  he  was  with  the  State  of  <  Oregon, 
Fish  and  Game  Department.  Our  besl  wishes  to  Harry  for  ;i  long  and 
happy  retirement. — A.  C.  Tuft.  Chief,  Bureau  of  Fish  Conservation, 


REVIEWS 

Wildlife  Management 

By  Ira  X.  Gabrielson ;  The  Macmillan  Company,  New  York.  1951  ;  xii  +  274p., 
m  illus.,  8  tables.  $4.50 

This  title  maj    confuse  readers  of  this  journal   for  two  reasons.  Not   long  ago 

a  I k  with  nearly  the  same  title  bul  written  bj  another  author  was  presented  to  the 

public  and  reviewed  herein  i  vol.  •">•".  1949,  p.  205).  In  the  second  place  Ira  Gabrielson, 
who  was  director  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service  for  eleven  years,  has  denned 
"wildlife"  i"  mean  nol  only  mammals  and  birds  but  iish  as  well.  This  authoritative 
innovation  maj    now  give  John   I  >oe  a   more  concise  meaning  of  the  term,  which  he 

undersl I  generallj    to  mean  onlj    land  animals.  The  booh   is  aimed  to  help  those 

interested  in  improving  the  position  of  wildlife,  and  the  author  appraises  cumin 
practices,  shows  the  need  for  repeated  checks  on  techniques,  and  emphasizes  the  use 
of  balanced  management  programs.  There  are  several  definitions  of  management  in  the 
book.  Basically,  wildlife  managemenl  is  a  two-fold  program  to  (a)  maintain  and 
utilize  a  resource  and  (b)  al  the  same  time  modifj  buman  activities  affecting  thai 
resource. 

In  explaining  these  phases  Dr.  Gabrielson  does  nol  plead  on  his  knees  for  wild- 
life. His  appraisals  and  discussions  are  straightforward  commentaries  on  the  principal 
features  of  a  relatively  new  profession.  It'  a  credo  is  apparent,  it  concerns  public  par- 
ticipation in  a  national  wildlife  program.  His  ideas  on  this  matter  are  presented  brieflj 

and  directlj    to  the  point.  Scattered  through  the  I k  are  succinct   kej   sentences,  [f 

these  sentences  and  certain  picture  captions  were  i<>  be  arranged  systematically,  both 
would  together  serve  as  a  primer  on  wildlife  management.  The  photographs  are  excel 
Lent,  bul   thej    would  have  served  a  better  purpose  arranged  in  the  same  sequence  as 

are  the  topics.  Technical  terms  are  almost  whollj   absent;  the  I k  is  more  effective 

because  of  this.  In  general  each  chapter  is  a  complete  discussion  of  a  topic  in  t his  order : 
history,  function,  limitations,  and  appraisal.  A  list  of  pertinent  and  basic  references 
follows  each  chapter  and  can  be  advantageously  used  by  those  who  will  read  more. 

A  very  pressing  need  for  better  methods  is  evident,  says  the  author,  in  biological 
research  in  both  game  and  fisheries  management,  in  public  education,  and  in  state 
administration.  Indeed,  this  comment  is  made  so  often  one  maj  wonder  where  progress 
has  been  made  at  all.  .Minor  discrepancies  occur.  At  lirst  mention  neither  the  Location 
nor  the  significance  of  the  events  at  Horseshoe  Lake.  Illinois,  are  explained.  The  tables 
ill  chapter  seven,  "Artificial  E'ropagation,"  seem  to  serve  no  immediate  purpose.  A  hint 
is  given  that  European  managemenl  methods  for  big  game  are  more  effective,  hut  this 
point  is  not  enlarged. 

Such  criticisms  of  "Wildlife  Management"  are  picayunish.  The  book  instantlj 
answers  the  i d  for  a  broad  critique  of  managemenl  practices  used  today.  It  is  parti- 
cularly well  written  and  will  he  a  standard  source  of  information  for  citizen,  legislator, 
student,  and  biologist.      Robert  />.  Eberhardt,  California  Division  of  Fish  ami  Game. 

Geography  of  the  Pacific 

(  )tis  W.  Freeman,  Editor;  John  Wiley  &  Sons,  Inc.,  New  York,  1951;  xii  +  573 
p..  lr.Gfigs.  $10. 

Here  is  an  excellent  account  of  the  Pacific,  its  lands  and  its  peoples.  There  has 
been  a  definite  need  for  a  comprehensive  reference  of  this  sort,  for  as  the  Pacific  con- 
tinues to  grow  in  world  importance  so  does  the  demand  for  information  about  it.  The 
authors  are  not  concerned  with  the  bordering  American  and  Asiatic  mainlands  nor 
do  they  consider  the  home  islands  of  Japan — existing  references  are  quite  adequate — 
hut  every  place  else  from  Australia  to  such  currently  unimportant  pinpoints  as  Clip- 
perton  Island  is  described  in  as  much  detail  as  knowledge  and  space  permit.  Thirteen 
men  contributed  to  the  volume,  most  of  them  representing  Pacific  Coast  and  Hawaiian 
institutions. 


(  353  ) 


354  CALIFORNIA  FISH   AND  GAME 

The  firsl  three  of  the  nineteen  chapters  treat  the  physical  geography,  native  i 

pies,  ;iihI  explorations  of  the  entire  Pacific,  and  the  last  presents  a  survej  of  trade, 
transportation  and  strategic  places.  Those  between  discuss  firsl  and  must  extensivelj 
Australia  and  then  the  island  groups.  These  chapters  follow  the  same  general  scheme, 
and  the  book  as  a  whole  is  cohesive,  something  which  cannot  always  be  said  where 
multiple  authorship  is  involved.  Physical  geography,  climate,  mineral  resources,  flora 
and  fauna,  agriculture,  fisheries,  commerce,  trade  and  industry,  the  inhabitants,  their 
history  and  government:  these  all  receive  consideration  in  rough  proportion  to  their 
importance.  Some  of  the  relative^  minor  topics  are  skipped  over  once  in  a  while,  but 
such  derelictions  arc  infrequent  and  nol  serious. 

The  book  is  recommended  bighlj  to  anyone  interested  in  the  Pacific,  be  his  inter 
esl  academic,  commercial,  or  simply  i  he  result  of  li\  ing  near  this  ocean  or  having  sailed 
it.  Well  illustrated  with  photographs  and  maps,  attractivelj  printed  and  bound,  it  will 
make  a  handsome  as  well  as  a  valuable  addition  to  one'-  library.  I'hil  1/.  I'urdrl, 
California  Division  of  Fish  and  <lmn< . 

The  Sea  Shore 

By  C.  M.  Yonge;  Collins.  London.  1949;  .'ill  p.,  til  color  ami  62  black  and  white 
photographs,  SS  text  figures.  $5. 

Americans  have  frequently  commented  on  the  knack  of  British  scientists  in  being 
both  willing  and  able  to  write  books  of  high  quality  which  serye  layman  and  fellow- 
scientist  alike.  Such  a  comment  is  very  much  in  order  here.  Professor  Yonge  not  only 
has  a  full  command  of  his  subject  but  he  writes  delightfully. 

The  intertidal  area  of  Britain  encompasses  highly  varied  environments  reflecting 
the  influence  of  both  warm  and  cold  waters  on  sandy  beaches,  rocky  coasts  and  estu- 
aries. It  has  been  the  object  of  intensive  study  lor  many  years,  and,  consequently,  there 
is  a  great  fund  of  knowledge  about  its  habitats  and  the  animals  and  plants  living  in 
them.  The  essence  of  that  knowledge  forms  the  subject  matter  of  the  book. 

In  his  introductory  chapters,  Professor  Yonge  presents  general  information  which 
provides  his  readers  with  the  background  necessary  for  an  understanding  of  the  shore. 
He  tells  something  of  the  history  of  studies  of  the  sea  shore  in  Britain,  describes  the 
kinds  of  animals  and  plants  to  be  found,  relates  a  bit  of  oceanography  so  that  one  can 
appreciate  the  influence  of  the  open  ocean  on  the  shore  and  its  denizens,  and  explains 
how  the  shore  is  affected  physically  by  the  impact  of  the  ocean  upon  it. 

.Most  of  the  book  deals  with  specific  habitats  or  with  groups  of  animals;  one 
chapter  is  devoted  to  marine  plants.  These  chapters  tell  the  story  of  life  as  it  exists 
within  the  limited  area  of  the  shore,  of  the  gradations  and  differences  one  will  find  as 
he  explores  the  various  zones  which  lie  between  high  water  line  and  low.  They  tell  of 
the  adaptations  of  the  inhabitants,  their  relationships  with  each  other  and  with  their 
environments — in  short,  the  ecology  of  this  meeting  place  of  land  and  ocean.  The  locale 
is  Britain  but  the  principles  are  as  valid  in  California. 

The  closing  sections  discuss  the  factors,  particularly  water  temperature,  which 
limit  the  ranges  of  intertidal  species  and  which  may  account  for  fluctuations  in  abund- 
ance, and  the  uses  to  which  shore  products  are  or  can  be  put.  It  will  probably  come  as 
a  surprise  to  many  readers  in  this  country,  most  of  whom  relish  a  wide  variety  of  sea- 
foods, that  the  English  make  relatively  little  use  of  these  resources.  There  is  an 
appendix  which  tells  briefly  of  major  references  and  an  index  and  glossary. 

The  many  illustrations  are  outstanding.  The  color  photographs  are  superb  and 
unquestionably  comprise  the  book's  most  striking  feature.  They  tend  to  overshadow 
the  black-and-white  photographs  which  by  themselves  would  be  sufficient  cause  for 
admiration. 

Anyone  Interested  in  natural  history  should  own  this  book. — Phil  M.  Roedel, 
California  Division  of  Fish  and  Game. 


REVIEWS  355 

Fishing  in  the  West 

By  Arthur  H.  Carha'rt ;  The  Macmillan  Company,  New  York,  1950 ;  viii  +  144 
p.,  illustrated.  $4.50. 

This  book  turns  out  to  be  little  more  than  a  compilation  of  chapters  each  of  which 
mighl  have  appeared  alone  in  a  monthly  outdoor  magazine.  .Most  of  them  start  off  jn 
somewhat  the  following  manner:  "Old  man  Colby  was  sort  of  a  recluse,"  or  "It  was 
time  i"  head  in  to  the  little  camp  fire."  The  purpose  of  the  book  is  to  stimulate  the 
imagination  of  the  angler  confined  to  the  eastern  side  of  the  .Mississippi  River  rather 
than  to  supply  much  useful  information  to  the  western  fisherman.  As  so  often  happens 
under  these  circumstances  the  atypical  and  unusual  situation  is  presented  rather  than 
the  common  experience,  such  ;is  the  following:  "His  rod  was  one  to  handle  a  torpedo 
line,  a  strong  1 1  footer,  and  the  fly  was  Ladj  Mite,  No.  14."  [t  is  hoped  that  no  inexperi 
(•need  angler  follows  ibis  advice  literally  in  any  of  our  California  waters. 

The  chapters  on  the  various  species  are  nol  too  accurate  and  some  misidentifica- 
tion  is  evident.  For  example,  "Kern  River  trout"  are  caught  in  Clear  Creek,  Colorado, 
a  badl\  polluted  stream  near  Denver,  and  six  separate  references  are  made  to  catching 
"silver  salmon"  in  the  .Missouri  River  al    Belena,  Montana. 

This  book  cannot  be  recommended  to  anj  student  of  fisheries,  but  it  will  be  good 
entertainment  for  any  apartmi  at-bound  sportsman.  It  makes  an  especially  strong  case 
for  habitat   improvement  and  condemns  "the  criminal  \\;iste  of  monej   on  hatcheries" — 

a  thought  which  should  cause  considerable  comment  ai ig  some  sportsmen. — /.'.    1/. 

Paul,  California  Division  <>i  Fish  and  Game. 


REPORTS 


FISH    CASES 
January,  February,  March,  1951 


1 

Number 

of 
arrests 

Fines 
imposed 

Jail 

sentences 

(days) 

Abalone:  Closed  season;  no  license;  undersize;  out  of  shell;  overlimit;  failure  to 
show  license  on  demand;  diving  in  District  19A;  taking  for  commercial  pur- 
poses in  District  19A;  closed  area . 

151 

238 
1 
2 

42 

7 
4 

10 
33 

4 

114 
2 

157 
2 
1 

4 

12 
3 

4 
1 
1 

21 
1 

$4,351.50 

3,715.00 

12.50 
30.00 

1,192.50 
255.00 
155.00 

160.00 

1.165.00 

90.00 

3,723.00 
60.00 

6,319.00 
225.00 
25.00 
145.00 

570.00 
100.00 

170.00 
50.00 
37.50 

885.00 
12.50 

Angling:  No  license;  possessing  gaff  within  300  feet  of  stream;  using  another's 
license;  fishing  in  closed  stream;  snagging;  2  lines;  2  poles;  failure  to  show 
license  on  demand;  spearing  fish  within  100  feet  of  lower  side  of  Mendota  Dam; 
niaking  false  statement  to  secure  license;  night  fishing;  using  7  poles;  angling 
in  closed  district;  set  lines;  treble  hook  .. 

281 

Barracuda:  Selling  undersize         

Bass,  Black:  Closed  season ;  no  license     __     __   .  

Bass,  Striped:  Possession  on  commercial  boat;  2  lines;  overlimit  and  sale  of 
undersized;  possession  in  restaurant;  no  license;  undersize;  taking  at  night; 
buying .       

Bluegill:  Closed  season  _          . 

Carp;  Taking  with  gaff  and  clubs;  no  license   

Catfish:  2  lines;  taking  other  than  by  angling;  selling  undersize;  possessing 
undersize;  no  license;  operating  set  line _   .   _               

Clam,  Cockle:  No  license;  overlimit;  undersize...  ...   

Clam,  Gaper:  No  license;  overlimit ...     .       

17 

Clam,  Pismo:  Overlimit;  undersize;  failure  to  show  on  demand;  no  license;  out 

of  shell;  selling;  digging  after  hours;  taking  after  hours;  night  clamming 

Clam,  Washington:  Xo  license;  overlimit .            .     

90 

Commercial:  Xo  commercial  license;  drag  net  in  131-.)  fathoms  (Monterey); 
failure  to  obtain  fish  packer's  license;  failure  to  keep  records;  operating  purse 
seiner  in  District  19A;  illegal  use  of  round  haul  net  in  closed  area;  taking  fish 
with  purse  seine  in  District  118.5;  operating  purse  seiner  in  District  118.5; 
failure  to  keep  and  return  log  record  on  drag  boat;  selling  fish  without  com- 
mercial license;  over  500  lbs.  crab  on  drag  boat;  no  dealer's  license;  failure  to 
issue  fish  receipts;  selling  short  catfish;  possessing  undersize  crabs;  using  drag 
net  inless  than  50  fathoms;  dragging  in  less  than  25  fathoms  in  District  17 

Crab:  Undersize;  taking  undersize  female  for  sale.         _   _  

373 

Crappie:  Closed  season..  .  

Frog:  Closed  season.  .         

Lobster:  Pulling  lobster  traps;  undersize;  possessing  undersize  and  resisting 
arrest;  operating  traps  in  closed  area        

Pollution:  Sawdust  in  stream;  oil;  sawdust  and  trash 

Salmon:  Xo  license;  spearing  within  300  feet  of  closed  stream;  attempting  to 
take  and  taking  on  spawning  beds. 

Shad:  Closed  season    _            

Sturgeon:  On  commercial  boat 

Trout:  Snagging;  no  license;  shooting  with  rifle;  closed  season;  overlimit;  using 
trout  roe;  fishing  in  closed  stream;  possessing  steelhead;  importing  without 
tags;  snagging  with  triple  hooks;  possessing  trout  and  gaff  hook  in  closed  area; 
spearing ■. 

YelJowtail:  Selling . 

Totals. 

815 

$23,448.50 

308.05 

49.00 

3,618.75 

761 

Seizures:  Abalone .. 

Crab 

Sardina 

Grand  total 

$27,424.30 

(356) 


REPORTS 


357 


GAME   CASES 
January,  February,  March,  1951 


Offense 


Number 

of 
arrests 


Fines 
imposed 


Jail 

Sentences 

(days) 


Bear:  Closed  season 

Beaver:  Closed  district 

Coot:  Closed  season;  taking  with  .22  rifle;  no  license;  late  shooting--.- 

Deer:  Closed  season;  attempting  to  take  overlimit;  taking  doe,  spike  buck, 
forked  horn;  illegal  possession;  unauthorized  possession  of  doe;  failure  to  tag; 
fai'ure  to  fill  out  tag;  night  hunting;  use  of  flashlight,  artificial  light;  posses- 
sion of  spotlight  while  hunting 

Deer  meat:  Possession  and  purchase  of  unstamped  meat;  possessing  illegal 
meat;  closed  season;  possession  and  sale;  possessing  unstamped  meat 

Dove:  Closed  season;  unplugged  gun;  bringing  from  Mexico  in  closed  season; 
overlimit 

Duck:  No  license;  possessing  gun  in  refuge  and  late  hunting;  closed  season;  over- 
limit;  late  shooting;  bringing  overlimit  from  Mexico;  unplugged  gun;  using 
.22  rifle  and  no  license;  shooting  from  powerboat;  undeclared 
from  auto;  attempting  to  take  at  night;  operating  powerboat  for  shooters; 
transferring  license  tags;  earlj  shooting;  shooting  tn  refuge;  failure  to  show 
license  on  demand  

Goose:  (  Hosed  season;  possession  of  gun  in  refuge;  late  hunting;  no  license;  hunt- 
ing on  refuge;  taking  with  .22  rifle;  overlimit ;  shooting  from  motorboai 
ing  overlimit  from  Mexico;  improperly  plugged  gun. 

Hunting:  I'sing  spotlight;  possession  ol  gun  m  refuge;  possession  of  gun  and 
light  at  night;  no  permit;  no  back  patch  in  cooperative  area:  night  hunting; 
falsifying  license;  discharging  gun  in  refuge;  QO  Incuse;  spotlighting;  hunting 
on  restricted  zone;  unplugged  gun;  carl,  shooting;  hunting  in  federal  Refuge 

Nongame  birds:  Taking  meadow  lark,  seagulls;  shooting  at  meadow  lark,  red- 
tail  hawk,  sparrow  hawk,  monkey-faced  owl,  woodr*    1 1 1 

1'heasant:  Closed  season:  taking  hen;  early  shooting;  shooting  from  pov 
failure  to  tag;  hunting  anil   possessing  in   closed  season;  no  game  breeder's 
license:  taking  in  closed  ."                         ■■■  ve  area;  unplugged  gun;  possessing 
without  tags;  taking  with  .22  rifle 

Pigeon:  ( Iverlimil ;  closed  season        _ 

Quail:  Closed  season;  overlimit;  possession  of  gun  and  light  in  quail  area  at 
night 

Rabbit:  Taking  at  night  in  closed  season;  no  In  take  in 

closed  season;  unplugged  gun;  transfer  of  hunting  license;  shooting  from 
public  road;  night  hunting;  hunting  with  anothei  ottontails 

in  closed  season;  .spotlighting  and  shooting  from  car 

Shore  birds:  Shooting  protected  shore  birds 

Swan:  Taking  wild  swan ._ _ 

Totals 


117 
3 

2 


$10.00 


165.00 

4,962.50 

2,000.00 

316.00 


207 

6,487.50 

39 

1,115.00 

72 

1,920.00 

9 

125.00 

28 

2 

1,165.00 

75.00 

765.00 


2,905.00 
75.00 
100.00 


200 
17H 


280 


$22,186.00 


767'  ■ 


358  CALLFORN  I A    PISH    AM)  GAME 

SEIZURES   OF    FISH    AND    GAME 
January,  February,  March,  1951 

Fish:                                                                                                                                       Pounds  Number 

Abalone 2  plus           3,122 

Barracuda 101  

Bass,  Black 37 

Bass,  Striped 135  plus               38 

Bass,  WhiteSea 9,818  

Bluegill 91 

Carp. _ _.  201 

Catfish 15  plus                65 

Clam,  Cockle 416  plus            8,675 

Clam,  Gaper...  76 

Clam,  Pismo 2,123 

Clam,  Washington _ 63 

Crab 870  plus               49 

Crappie -.-  13 

Frog 25 

Lobster 47  plus              113 

Salmon 65^2  plus                 3 

Sardine 270,500  

Shad 6 

Sturgeon 2 

Trout 35  plus               44 

Yellowtail 304  

Game: 

Beaver 1 

Beaver,  hides 4 

Coot 13 

Deer 259  plus               22 

Dove 83 

Duck 505 

Goose 72 

Nongame  birds 9 

Pheasant . 18 

Quail 62 

Rabbit 84 

Squirrel 1 

Swan 2 


printed  in  California  state  printing  office 
41374      3-51      7500